WO2021049657A1

WO2021049657A1 - Organic electroluminescence element and electronic device

Info

Publication number: WO2021049657A1
Application number: PCT/JP2020/034597
Authority: WO
Inventors: 聡美田崎; 西村　和樹; 裕基中野
Original assignee: 出光興産株式会社
Priority date: 2019-09-13
Filing date: 2020-09-11
Publication date: 2021-03-18

Abstract

This organic electroluminescence element (1) has an anode (3), a cathode (4), a first light-emitting layer (51), and a second light-emitting layer (52) arranged between the first light-emitting layer (51) and the cathode (4). The first light-emitting layer (51) contains a first host material that is a first compound represented by general formula (101). The second light-emitting layer (52) contains a second host material that is a second compound represented by general formula (2). The first light-emitting layer (51) and the second light-emitting layer (52) are in direct contact with each other.

Description

Organic electroluminescence devices and electronic devices

The present invention relates to an organic electroluminescence device and an electronic device.

Organic electroluminescence devices (hereinafter, may be referred to as “organic EL devices”) are applied to full-color displays such as mobile phones and televisions. When a voltage is applied to the organic EL element, holes are injected into the light emitting layer from the anode, and electrons are injected into the light emitting layer from the cathode. Then, in the light emitting layer, the injected holes and electrons are recombined to form excitons. At this time, according to the statistical law of electron spin, singlet excitons are generated at a rate of 25%, and triplet excitons are generated at a rate of 75%.
In order to improve the performance of organic EL devices, various studies have been conducted on compounds used in organic EL devices (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 to 6). The performance of the organic EL element includes, for example, brightness, emission wavelength, chromaticity, luminous efficiency, drive voltage, and life.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-157552 International Publication No. 2004/018587 International Publication No. 2005/1195950 International Publication No. 2011/077691 JP-A-2018-125504 U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2019/280209

One of the objects of the present invention is to provide an organic electroluminescence element having improved performance. Another object of the present invention is to provide an organic electroluminescence element having improved luminous efficiency, and to provide an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescence element.

According to one aspect of the present invention, the anode, the cathode, the first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode, and the first light emitting layer arranged between the first light emitting layer and the cathode. The first light emitting layer has two light emitting layers, the first light emitting layer has at least one group represented by the following general formula (11), and the first light emitting layer is represented by the following general formula (1). The compound is contained as the first host material, and the second light emitting layer contains the second compound represented by the following general formula (2) as the second host material, and is combined with the first light emitting layer. Provided is an organic electroluminescence element in which the second light emitting layer is in direct contact with the second light emitting layer.

(In the general formula (1),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atom-forming atoms, or a group represented by the general formula (11).
However, _{at least one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ is a group represented by the general formula (11).
When there are a plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11), the plurality of groups represented by the general formula (11) are the same or different from each other.
L ₁₀₁ is
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
If Ar ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, two or more _{Ar 101} may be identical to each other or different,
* In the general formula (11) indicates the bonding position with the pyrene ring in the general formula (1). )

(In the general formula (2),
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )
(Of the first compound represented by the general formula (1) and the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ , R ₉₀₇ , R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R ₉₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 901} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 902} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 903} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₄ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 904} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₅ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 905} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₆ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 906} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₇ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 907} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} may or different are identical to one another. )

According to one aspect of the present invention, an anode, a cathode, a first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode, and a first light emitting layer arranged between the first light emitting layer and the cathode. It has two light emitting layers, the first light emitting layer contains a first compound represented by the following general formula (101) as a first host material, and the second light emitting layer is An organic electroluminescence element containing the second compound represented by the general formula (2) as a second host material and in which the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other. Provided.

(In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 101,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _101.
L ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
Of one or a plurality of L _101s , at least one L ₁₀₁ is a group represented by the following general formula (130) or the following general formula (140). )

(In the general formula (130) and the general formula (140),
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₁₃₀₁ to R ₁₃₁₆
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
R ₁₃₀₁ , R ₁₃₀₃ or R ₁₃₀₄
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
_{The substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and R 1305} to R ₁₃₁₆ that do not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the pair consisting of two or more adjacent R ₁₃₀₅ to R _{1316 are the substituted or unsubstituted.} One of the bonds in the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms constituting the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring when the monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is formed. hand,
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₈
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
R ₁₄₀₁ , R ₁₄₀₃ or R ₁₄₀₄
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
_{R 1405} to R ₁₄₁₈ that do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the pair consisting of two or more adjacent R ₁₄₀₅ to R _{1418 are the substituted or unsubstituted.} One of the bonds in the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms constituting the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring when the monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is formed. hand,
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
_{R 1301} to R _{1316 and} R 1301 to R 1316 which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring and are not the bonding positions with _{L 101} , R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ and R ₁₁₁ to R _120. R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), -O- ( A group represented by R ₉₀₄ ), a group represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ . -A _{group represented by COOR 802} , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

According to one aspect of the present invention, the anode, the cathode, the first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode, and the first light emitting layer arranged between the first light emitting layer and the cathode. It has two light emitting layers, the first light emitting layer contains the first compound represented by the following general formula (101) as a first host material, and the second light emitting layer is An organic electroluminescence element containing the second compound represented by the general formula (2) as a second host material and in which the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other. Is provided.

(In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 101,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _101.
L ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
At least one L ₁₀₁ is any group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to (TEMP-62). )

(In the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to (TEMP-62),
Q ₁ ~ _{Q 10} are each independently hydrogen atom, or a substituent,
Q ₉ and Q ₁₀ are bonded to each other via a single bond to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or are not bonded to each other.
* Represents the bond position. )

According to one aspect of the present invention, an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescence element according to the above-mentioned one aspect of the present invention is provided.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an organic electroluminescence element having improved performance. Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an organic electroluminescence element having improved luminous efficiency. Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide an electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescence element.

It is a figure which shows the schematic structure of an example of the organic electroluminescence device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention.

[Definition]
In the present specification, a hydrogen atom includes isotopes having different numbers of neutrons, that is, hydrogen (protium), deuterium (deuterium), and tritium (tritium).

In the present specification, a hydrogen atom, that is, a light hydrogen atom, a deuterium atom, or a deuterium atom is located at a bondable position in which a symbol such as "R" or a "D" representing a deuterium atom is not specified in the chemical structural formula. It is assumed that the deuterium atom is bonded.

In the present specification, the ring-forming carbon number constitutes the ring itself of a compound having a structure in which atoms are cyclically bonded (for example, a monocyclic compound, a fused ring compound, a crosslinked compound, a carbocyclic compound, and a heterocyclic compound). Represents the number of carbon atoms among the atoms to be used. When the ring is substituted with a substituent, the carbon contained in the substituent is not included in the ring-forming carbon number. The "ring-forming carbon number" described below shall be the same unless otherwise specified. For example, the benzene ring has 6 ring-forming carbon atoms, the naphthalene ring has 10 ring-forming carbon atoms, the pyridine ring has 5 ring-forming carbon atoms, and the furan ring has 4 ring-forming carbon atoms. Further, for example, the ring-forming carbon number of the 9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group is 13, and the ring-forming carbon number of the 9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group is 25.
Further, when the benzene ring is substituted with, for example, an alkyl group as a substituent, the carbon number of the alkyl group is not included in the ring-forming carbon number of the benzene ring. Therefore, the ring-forming carbon number of the benzene ring substituted with the alkyl group is 6. Further, when the naphthalene ring is substituted with an alkyl group as a substituent, for example, the carbon number of the alkyl group is not included in the ring-forming carbon number of the naphthalene ring. Therefore, the ring-forming carbon number of the naphthalene ring substituted with the alkyl group is 10.

In the present specification, the number of ring-forming atoms is a compound (for example, a monocyclic compound, a fused ring compound, a crosslinked compound, a carbocycle) having a structure in which atoms are cyclically bonded (for example, a monocycle, a fused ring, and a ring assembly). Represents the number of atoms constituting the ring itself of a compound and a heterocyclic compound). Atoms that do not form a ring (for example, a hydrogen atom that terminates the bond of atoms that form a ring) and atoms included in the substituent when the ring is substituted by a substituent are not included in the number of ring-forming atoms. The "number of ring-forming atoms" described below shall be the same unless otherwise specified. For example, the pyridine ring has 6 ring-forming atoms, the quinazoline ring has 10 ring-forming atoms, and the furan ring has 5 ring-forming atoms. For example, the number of hydrogen atoms bonded to the pyridine ring or the number of atoms constituting the substituent is not included in the number of pyridine ring-forming atoms. Therefore, the number of ring-forming atoms of the pyridine ring to which the hydrogen atom or the substituent is bonded is 6. Further, for example, a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom of a quinazoline ring or an atom constituting a substituent is not included in the number of ring-forming atoms of the quinazoline ring. Therefore, the number of ring-forming atoms of the quinazoline ring to which a hydrogen atom or a substituent is bonded is 10.

In the present specification, the "carbon number XX to YY" in the expression "ZZ group having a substituted or unsubstituted carbon number XX to YY" represents the carbon number when the ZZ group is unsubstituted and is substituted. Does not include the carbon number of the substituent in the case. Here, "YY" is larger than "XX", "XX" means an integer of 1 or more, and "YY" means an integer of 2 or more.

In the present specification, "the number of atoms XX to YY" in the expression "the ZZ group having the number of atoms XX to YY substituted or unsubstituted" represents the number of atoms when the ZZ group is unsubstituted and is substituted. Does not include the number of atoms of the substituent in the case. Here, "YY" is larger than "XX", "XX" means an integer of 1 or more, and "YY" means an integer of 2 or more.

In the present specification, the unsubstituted ZZ group represents the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group" is the "unsubstituted ZZ group", and the substituted ZZ group is the "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group". Represents the case where is a "substitution ZZ group".
As used herein, the term "unsubstituted" in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group" means that the hydrogen atom in the ZZ group is not replaced with the substituent. The hydrogen atom in the "unsubstituted ZZ group" is a light hydrogen atom, a deuterium atom, or a tritium atom.
Further, in the present specification, the term "substitution" in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted ZZ group" means that one or more hydrogen atoms in the ZZ group are replaced with the substituent. Similarly, "substitution" in the case of "BB group substituted with AA group" means that one or more hydrogen atoms in the BB group are replaced with AA group.

"Substituents described herein"
Hereinafter, the substituents described in the present specification will be described.

The ring-forming carbon number of the "unsubstituted aryl group" described herein is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18, unless otherwise stated herein. ..
The number of ring-forming atoms of the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described herein is 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, more preferably 5 to 18, unless otherwise stated herein. is there.
The carbon number of the "unsubstituted alkyl group" described herein is 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, and more preferably 1 to 6, unless otherwise stated herein.
The carbon number of the "unsubstituted alkenyl group" described herein is 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 6, unless otherwise stated herein.
The carbon number of the "unsubstituted alkynyl group" described herein is 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, and more preferably 2 to 6, unless otherwise stated herein.
The ring-forming carbon number of the "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described herein is 3 to 50, preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 3 to 6, unless otherwise stated herein. is there.
Unless otherwise stated herein, the ring-forming carbon number of the "unsubstituted arylene group" described herein is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 18. ..
Unless otherwise stated herein, the number of ring-forming atoms of the "unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group" described herein is 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, more preferably 5. ~ 18.
The carbon number of the "unsubstituted alkylene group" described herein is 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, and more preferably 1 to 6, unless otherwise stated herein.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted aryl group"
Specific examples (specific example group G1) of the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted aryl group (specific example group G1A) and a substituted aryl group (specific example group G1B). ) Etc. can be mentioned. (Here, the unsubstituted aryl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" is the "unsubstituted aryl group", and the substituted aryl group is the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group". Refers to the case of "substituted aryl group".) In the present specification, the term "aryl group" includes both "unsubstituted aryl group" and "substituted aryl group".
The "substituted aryl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "unsubstituted aryl group" are replaced with a substituent. Examples of the "substituted aryl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "unsubstituted aryl group" of the following specific example group G1A are replaced with a substituent, and a substituted aryl group of the following specific example group G1B. And the like. The examples of the "unsubstituted aryl group" and the "substituted aryl group" listed here are merely examples, and the "substituted aryl group" described in the present specification includes the following specific examples. The group in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom of the aryl group itself in the "substituted aryl group" of group G1B is further replaced with the substituent, and the hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted aryl group" of the following specific example group G1B Further, a group that has replaced the substituent is also included.

• Unsubstituted aryl group (Specific example group G1A):
Phenyl group,
p-biphenyl group,
m-biphenyl group,
o-biphenyl group,
p-terphenyl-4-yl group,
p-terphenyl-3-yl group,
p-terphenyl-2-yl group,
m-terphenyl-4-yl group,
m-terphenyl-3-yl group,
m-terphenyl-2-yl group,
o-terphenyl-4-yl group,
o-terphenyl-3-yl group,
o-terphenyl-2-yl group,
1-naphthyl group,
2-naphthyl group,
Anthril group,
Benzoanthril group,
Phenantril group,
Benzophenanthryl group,
Fenarenyl group,
Pyrenyl group,
Chrysenyl group,
Benzocrisenyl group,
Triphenylenyl group,
Benzodiazepineyl group,
Tetrasenyl group,
Pentacenyl group,
Fluorenyl group,
9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group,
Benzofluorenyl group,
Dibenzofluorenyl group,
Fluorantenyl group,
Benzodiazepineyl group,
A perylenyl group and a monovalent aryl group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-1) to (TEMP-15).

Substituent aryl group (specific example group G1B): o-tolyl group,
m-tolyl group,
p-tolyl group,
Parakisilyl group,
Meta-kisilyl group,
Ortho-kisilyl group,
Para-isopropylphenyl group,
Meta-isopropylphenyl group,
Ortho-isopropylphenyl group,
Para-t-butylphenyl group,
Meta-t-butylphenyl group,
Ortho-t-butylphenyl group,
3,4,5-trimethylphenyl group,
9,9-Dimethylfluorenyl group,
9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group,
9,9-bis (4-methylphenyl) fluorenyl group,
9,9-Bis (4-isopropylphenyl) fluorenyl group,
9,9-bis (4-t-butylphenyl) fluorenyl group,
Cyanophenyl group,
Triphenylsilylphenyl group,
Trimethylsilylphenyl group,
Phenylnaphthyl group,
A naphthylphenyl group and a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent group derived from the ring structure represented by the general formulas (TEMP-1) to (TEMP-15) are replaced with a substituent.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group"
The "heterocyclic group" described herein is a cyclic group containing at least one heteroatom in the ring-forming atom. Specific examples of the hetero atom include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a silicon atom, a phosphorus atom, and a boron atom.
The "heterocyclic group" described herein is a monocyclic group or a condensed ring group.
The "heterocyclic group" described herein is an aromatic heterocyclic group or a non-aromatic heterocyclic group.
Specific examples (specific example group G2) of the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted heterocyclic group (specific example group G2A) and a substituted heterocyclic group (specific example group G2). Specific example group G2B) and the like can be mentioned. (Here, the unsubstituted heterocyclic group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" is the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group", and the substituted heterocyclic group is "substituted or unsubstituted". Refers to the case where the "heterocyclic group" is a "substituted heterocyclic group".) In the present specification, the term "heterocyclic group" is simply referred to as "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" and "substituted heterocyclic group". Including both.
The "substituted heterocyclic group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted heterocyclic group" include a group in which the hydrogen atom of the "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" of the following specific example group G2A is replaced, an example of the substituted heterocyclic group of the following specific example group G2B, and the like. Can be mentioned. The examples of "unsubstituted heterocyclic group" and "substituent heterocyclic group" listed here are merely examples, and the "substituted heterocyclic group" described in the present specification is specifically referred to as "substituent heterocyclic group". A group in which a hydrogen atom bonded to a ring-forming atom of the heterocyclic group itself in the "substituent heterocyclic group" of the example group G2B is further replaced with a substituent, and a substituent in the "substituent heterocyclic group" of the specific example group G2B. Also included are groups in which the hydrogen atom of the above has been replaced with a substituent.

The specific example group G2A is, for example, an unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing the following nitrogen atom (specific example group G2A1), an unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2A2), and a non-substituted heterocyclic group containing a sulfur atom. (Specific example group G2A3) and a monovalent heterocyclic group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring structures represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33). (Specific example group G2A4) is included.

The specific example group G2B is, for example, a substituted heterocyclic group containing the following nitrogen atom (specific example group G2B1), a substituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2B2), and a substituted heterocycle containing a sulfur atom. One or more hydrogen atoms of the group (specific example group G2B3) and the monovalent heterocyclic group derived from the ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) are the substituents. Includes replaced groups (specific example group G2B4).

-Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2A1):
Pyrrolyl group,
Imidazolyl group,
Pyrazolyl group,
Triazolyl group,
Tetrazoleyl group,
Oxazolyl group,
Isooxazolyl group,
Oxaziazolyl group,
Thiazolyl group,
Isothiazolyl group,
Thiasia Zoryl group,
Pyridyl group,
Pyridadinyl group,
Pyrimidinyl group,
Pyrazinel group,
Triazinyl group,
Indrill group,
Isoin drill group,
Indridinyl group,
Kinolidinyl group,
Quinoline group,
Isoquinolyl group,
Synnolyl group,
Phtaladinyl group,
Kinazolinyl group,
Kinoxalinyl group,
Benzoimidazolyl group,
Indazolyl group,
Phenantrolinyl group,
Phenantridinyl group,
Acridinyl group,
Phenazinyl group,
Carbazoleyl group,
Benzodiazepine group,
Morpholine group,
Phenoxadinyl group,
Phenothiadinyl group,
Azacarbazolyl group and diazacarbazolyl group.

-Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2A2):
Frill group,
Oxazolyl group,
Isooxazolyl group,
Oxaziazolyl group,
Xanthenyl group,
Benzofuranyl group,
Isobenzofuranyl group,
Dibenzofuranyl group,
Naftbenzofuranyl group,
Benzodiazepine group,
Benzoisoxazolyl group,
Phenoxadinyl group,
Morpholine group,
Ginaftfuranyl group,
Azadibenzofuranyl group,
Diazadibenzofuranyl group,
Azanaftbenzofuranyl group and diazanaphthobenzofuranyl group.

-Unsubstituted heterocyclic group containing a sulfur atom (specific example group G2A3):
Thienyl group,
Thiazolyl group,
Isothiazolyl group,
Thiasia Zoryl group,
Benzothiophenyl group (benzothienyl group),
Isobenzothiophenyl group (isobenzothienyl group),
Dibenzothiophenyl group (dibenzothienyl group),
Naftbenzothiophenyl group (naphthobenzothienyl group),
Benzothiazolyl group,
Benzoisothiazolyl group,
Phenothiadinyl group,
Dinaftthiophenyl group (dinaftthienyl group),
Azadibenzothiophenyl group (azadibenzothienyl group),
Diazadibenzothiophenyl group (diazadibenzothienyl group),
Azanaftbenzothiophenyl group (azanaftbenzothienyl group) and diazanaphthobenzothiophenyl group (diazanaftbenzothienyl group).

A monovalent heterocyclic group derived by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring structure represented by the following general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) (specific example group G2A4):

In Formula (TEMP-16) ~ (TEMP -33), the _{X A} and _{Y A,} each independently, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, NH, or is CH _2. Provided that at least one of _{X A} and _{Y A} represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or is NH.
In Formula (TEMP-16) ~ (TEMP -33), at least one is NH of _{X A} and _{Y A,} or a CH _2, in the general formula (TEMP-16) ~ (TEMP -33) The monovalent heterocyclic group derived from the ring structure represented includes a monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from _{these NH or CH 2.}

-Substituted heterocyclic group containing a nitrogen atom (specific example group G2B1):
(9-Phenyl) carbazolyl group,
(9-biphenylyl) carbazolyl group,
(9-Phenyl) Phenylcarbazolyl group,
(9-naphthyl) carbazolyl group,
Diphenylcarbazole-9-yl group,
Phenylcarbazole-9-yl group,
Methylbenzoimidazolyl group,
Ethylbenzoimidazolyl group,
Phenyltriazinyl group,
Biphenylyl triazinyl group,
Diphenyltriazinyl group,
Phenylquinazolinyl group and biphenylylquinazolinyl group.

-Substituted heterocyclic group containing an oxygen atom (specific example group G2B2):
Phenyldibenzofuranyl group,
Methyl dibenzofuranyl group,
A monovalent residue of the t-butyldibenzofuranyl group and spiro [9H-xanthene-9,9'-[9H] fluorene].

-Substituted heterocyclic group containing a sulfur atom (specific example group G2B3):
Phenyl dibenzothiophenyl group,
Methyl dibenzothiophenyl group,
A monovalent residue of the t-butyldibenzothiophenyl group and spiro [9H-thioxanthene-9,9'-[9H] fluorene].

A group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of a monovalent heterocyclic group derived from the ring structure represented by the general formulas (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) are replaced with a substituent (Specific Example Group G2B4). ):

The "one or more hydrogen atoms of the monovalent heterocyclic group" means that at least one of hydrogen atoms, XA and YA bonded to the ring-forming carbon atom of the monovalent heterocyclic group is NH. It means one or more hydrogen atoms selected from the hydrogen atom bonded to the nitrogen atom of the case and the hydrogen atom of the methylene group when one of XA and YA is CH2.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group"
Specific examples (specific example group G3) of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted alkyl group (specific example group G3A) and a substituted alkyl group (specific example group G3B). ). (Here, the unsubstituted alkyl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is the "unsubstituted alkyl group", and the substituted alkyl group means the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group". Refers to the case of "substituted alkyl group".) Hereinafter, the term "alkyl group" includes both "unsubstituted alkyl group" and "substituted alkyl group".
The "substituted alkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkyl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the following "unsubstituted alkyl group" (specific example group G3A) are replaced with a substituent, and a substituted alkyl group (specific example). Examples of group G3B) can be mentioned. As used herein, the alkyl group in the "unsubstituted alkyl group" means a chain alkyl group. Therefore, the "unsubstituted alkyl group" includes a linear "unsubstituted alkyl group" and a branched "unsubstituted alkyl group". The examples of the "unsubstituted alkyl group" and the "substituted alkyl group" listed here are only examples, and the "substituted alkyl group" described in the present specification includes the specific example group G3B. A group in which the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group itself in the "substituted alkyl group" of the above is further replaced with a substituent, and a group in which the hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted alkyl group" of the specific example group G3B is further replaced with a substituent. included.

-Unsubstituted alkyl group (specific example group G3A):
Methyl group,
Ethyl group,
n-propyl group,
Isopropyl group,
n-Butyl group,
Isobutyl group,
s-Butyl group and t-Butyl group.

Substituent alkyl group (specific example group G3B):
Propylfluoropropyl group (including isomers),
Pentafluoroethyl group,
2,2,2-trifluoroethyl group, and trifluoromethyl group.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group"
Specific examples (specific example group G4) of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4A) and a substituted alkenyl group (specific example group). G4B) and the like can be mentioned. (Here, the unsubstituted alkenyl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group" is an "unsubstituted alkenyl group", and the "substituted alkenyl group" is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group". Refers to the case where "is a substituted alkenyl group".) In the present specification, the term "alkenyl group" includes both "unsubstituted alkenyl group" and "substituted alkenyl group".
The "substituted alkenyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "unsubstituted alkenyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkenyl group" include a group in which the following "unsubstituted alkenyl group" (specific example group G4A) has a substituent, an example of a substituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4B), and the like. Be done. The examples of the "unsubstituted alkenyl group" and the "substituted alkenyl group" listed here are only examples, and the "substituted alkenyl group" described in the present specification includes the specific example group G4B. A group in which the hydrogen atom of the alkenyl group itself in the "substituted alkenyl group" of the above is further replaced with a substituent, and a group in which the hydrogen atom of the substituent in the "substituted alkenyl group" of the specific example group G4B is further replaced with a substituent. included.

• Unsubstituted alkenyl group (specific example group G4A):
Vinyl group,
Allyl group,
1-butenyl group,
2-butenyl group and 3-butenyl group.

Substituent alkenyl group (specific example group G4B):
1,3-Butandienyl group,
1-Methyl vinyl group,
1-methylallyl group,
1,1-dimethylallyl group,
2-Methylallyl group and 1,2-dimethylallyl group.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group"
Specific examples (specific example group G5) of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted alkynyl groups (specific example group G5A) and the like. (Here, the unsubstituted alkynyl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group" is the "unsubstituted alkynyl group".) Hereinafter, the term "alkynyl group" is simply referred to as "unsubstituted alkynyl group". Includes both "alkynyl groups" and "substituted alkynyl groups".
The "substituted alkynyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "unsubstituted alkynyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted alkynyl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent in the following "unsubstituted alkynyl group" (specific example group G5A).

-Unsubstituted alkynyl group (specific example group G5A): ethynyl group

-"Substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group"
Specific examples (specific example group G6) of the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in the present specification include the following unsubstituted cycloalkyl group (specific example group G6A) and a substituted cycloalkyl group (specific example group G6A). Specific example group G6B) and the like can be mentioned. (Here, the unsubstituted cycloalkyl group refers to the case where the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" is the "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group", and the substituted cycloalkyl group is the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group". Refers to the case where the "cycloalkyl group" is a "substituted cycloalkyl group".) In the present specification, the term "cycloalkyl group" is simply referred to as "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" and "substituted cycloalkyl group". Including both.
The "substituted cycloalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. Specific examples of the "substituted cycloalkyl group" include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent in the following "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" (specific example group G6A), and a substituted cycloalkyl group. Examples of (Specific example group G6B) can be mentioned. The examples of the "unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" and the "substituted cycloalkyl group" listed here are merely examples, and the "substituted cycloalkyl group" described in the present specification is specifically referred to as "substituent cycloalkyl group". In the "substituted cycloalkyl group" of Example group G6B, a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group itself are replaced with the substituent, and in the "substituted cycloalkyl group" of Specific Example group G6B. A group in which the hydrogen atom of the substituent is further replaced with the substituent is also included.

-Unsubstituted cycloalkyl group (Specific example group G6A):
Cyclopropyl group,
Cyclobutyl group,
Cyclopentyl group,
Cyclohexyl group,
1-adamantyl group,
2-adamantyl group,
1-norbornyl group and 2-norbornyl group.

Substituent cycloalkyl group (Specific example group G6B):
4-Methylcyclohexyl group.

-"A group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903)"
As a specific example (specific example group G7) of the group represented by _{−Si (R 901} ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ) described in the present specification,
-Si (G1) (G1) (G1),
-Si (G1) (G2) (G2),
-Si (G1) (G1) (G2),
-Si (G2) (G2) (G2),
-Si (G3) (G3) (G3), and -Si (G6) (G6) (G6)
Can be mentioned. here,
G1 is the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.
G2 is the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.
G3 is the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the specific example group G3.
G6 is the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in the specific example group G6.
-A plurality of G1s in Si (G1) (G1) (G1) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G2s in Si (G1) (G2) (G2) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G1s in Si (G1) (G1) (G2) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G2s in Si (G2) (G2) (G2) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G3s in Si (G3) (G3) (G3) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G6s in Si (G6) (G6) (G6) are the same as or different from each other.

-"A group represented by -O- (R _904)"
As a specific example (specific example group G8) of the group represented by _{—O— (R 904} ) described in the present specification,
-O (G1),
-O (G2),
-O (G3) and -O (G6)
Can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.
G2 is the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.
G3 is the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the specific example group G3.
G6 is the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in the specific example group G6.

-"A group represented by -S- (R _905)"
As a specific example (specific example group G9) of the group represented by _{—S— (R 905} ) described in the present specification,
-S (G1),
-S (G2),
-S (G3) and -S (G6)
Can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.
G2 is the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.
G3 is the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the specific example group G3.
G6 is the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in the specific example group G6.

-"A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907)"
As a specific example (specific example group G10) of the group represented by _{−N (R 906} ) (R ₉₀₇ ) described in the present specification,
-N (G1) (G1),
-N (G2) (G2),
-N (G1) (G2),
-N (G3) (G3) and -N (G6) (G6)
Can be mentioned.
here,
G1 is the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.
G2 is the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.
G3 is the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the specific example group G3.
G6 is the "substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group" described in the specific example group G6.
A plurality of G1s in -N (G1) (G1) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G2s in N (G2) (G2) are the same as or different from each other.
-A plurality of G3s in N (G3) (G3) are the same as or different from each other.
A plurality of G6s in -N (G6) (G6) are the same as or different from each other.

・ "Halogen atom"
Specific examples of the "halogen atom" described in the present specification (specific example group G11) include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom and the like.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group"
In the "substituted or unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" described herein, at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting the alkyl group in the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is replaced with a fluorine atom. It also includes a group (perfluoro group) in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting the alkyl group in the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with fluorine atoms. The "unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" has 1 to 50 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, unless otherwise specified herein. The "substituted fluoroalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "fluoroalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. The "substituted fluoroalkyl group" described in the present specification includes a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom of the alkyl chain in the "substituted fluoroalkyl group" are further replaced with a substituent, and a group. Also included are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the substituent in the "substituted fluoroalkyl group" are further replaced by the substituent. Specific examples of the "unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group" include an example of a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "alkyl group" (specific example group G3) are replaced with a fluorine atom.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group"
In the "substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group" described herein, at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom constituting the alkyl group in the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" is replaced with a halogen atom. It means a group and includes a group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting the alkyl group in the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" are replaced with halogen atoms. The "unsubstituted haloalkyl group" has 1 to 50 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, unless otherwise specified herein. The "substituted haloalkyl group" means a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the "haloalkyl group" are replaced with a substituent. The "substituted haloalkyl group" described in the present specification includes a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom of the alkyl chain in the "substituted haloalkyl group" are further replaced with a substituent, and a "substitution". Also included are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the substituents in the "haloalkyl group" are further replaced by the substituents. Specific examples of the "unsubstituted haloalkyl group" include an example of a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the "alkyl group" (specific example group G3) are replaced with halogen atoms. The haloalkyl group may be referred to as an alkyl halide group.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group"
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group" described in the present specification is a group represented by —O (G3), where G3 is the “substituted or substituted” described in the specific example group G3. It is an unsubstituted alkyl group. The "unsubstituted alkoxy group" has 1 to 50 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, unless otherwise specified herein.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group"
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group" described in the present specification is a group represented by −S (G3), where G3 is the “substituted or substituted” described in the specific example group G3. It is an unsubstituted alkyl group. Unless otherwise specified herein, the "unsubstituted alkylthio group" has 1 to 50 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group"
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group" described in the present specification is a group represented by —O (G1), where G1 is the “substitution” described in the specific example group G1. Alternatively, it is an unsubstituted aryl group. " The ring-forming carbon number of the "unsubstituted aryloxy group" is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 18, unless otherwise stated herein.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group"
A specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group" described in the present specification is a group represented by -S (G1), where G1 is the "substituted or substituted arylthio group" described in the specific example group G1. It is an unsubstituted aryl group. " The ring-forming carbon number of the "unsubstituted arylthio group" is 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 18, unless otherwise stated herein.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted trialkylsilyl group"
Specific examples of the "trialkylsilyl group" described in the present specification are groups represented by −Si (G3) (G3) (G3), where G3 is described in the specific example group G3. It is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group". -A plurality of G3s in Si (G3) (G3) (G3) are the same as or different from each other. The carbon number of each alkyl group of the "trialkylsilyl group" is 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, and more preferably 1 to 6, unless otherwise specified herein.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group"
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted arylyl group" described in the present specification are groups represented by-(G3)-(G1), where G3 is described in the specific example group G3. It is a "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group", and G1 is a "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1. Therefore, the "aralkyl group" is a group in which the hydrogen atom of the "alkyl group" is replaced with the "aryl group" as the substituent, and is one aspect of the "substituted alkyl group". The "unsubstituted aralkyl group" is an "unsubstituted alkyl group" substituted with an "unsubstituted aryl group", and the carbon number of the "unsubstituted aralkyl group" is unless otherwise specified herein. , 7 to 50, preferably 7 to 30, and more preferably 7 to 18.
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group" include a benzyl group, a 1-phenylethyl group, a 2-phenylethyl group, a 1-phenylisopropyl group, a 2-phenylisopropyl group, a phenyl-t-butyl group, and an α. -Naphthylmethyl group, 1-α-naphthylethyl group, 2-α-naphthylethyl group, 1-α-naphthylisopropyl group, 2-α-naphthylisopropyl group, β-naphthylmethyl group, 1-β-naphthylethyl group , 2-β-naphthylethyl group, 1-β-naphthylisopropyl group, 2-β-naphthylisopropyl group and the like.

The substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups described herein are preferably phenyl groups, p-biphenyl groups, m-biphenyl groups, o-biphenyl groups, p-terphenyl-unless otherwise described herein. 4-Il group, p-terphenyl-3-yl group, p-terphenyl-2-yl group, m-terphenyl-4-yl group, m-terphenyl-3-yl group, m-terphenyl- 2-Il group, o-terphenyl-4-yl group, o-terphenyl-3-yl group, o-terphenyl-2-yl group, 1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group , Pyrenyl group, chrysenyl group, triphenylenyl group, fluorenyl group, 9,9'-spirobifluorenyl group, 9,9-dimethylfluorenyl group, 9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group and the like.

The substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group described herein is preferably a pyridyl group, a pyrimidinyl group, a triazine group, a quinolyl group, an isoquinolyl group, a quinazolinyl group, a benzoimidazolyl group, or a phenyl group, unless otherwise described herein. Nantrolinyl group, carbazolyl group (1-carbazolyl group, 2-carbazolyl group, 3-carbazolyl group, 4-carbazolyl group, or 9-carbazolyl group), benzocarbazolyl group, azacarbazolyl group, diazacarbazolyl group , Dibenzofuranyl group, naphthobenzofuranyl group, azadibenzofuranyl group, diazadibenzofuranyl group, dibenzothiophenyl group, naphthobenzothiophenyl group, azadibenzothiophenyl group, diazadibenzothiophenyl group, ( 9-Phenyl) Carbazolyl Group ((9-Phenyl) Carbazole-1-yl Group, (9-Phenyl) Carbazole-2-yl Group, (9-Phenyl) Carbazole-3-yl Group, or (9-Phenyl) Carbazole Group -4-yl group), (9-biphenylyl) carbazolyl group, (9-phenyl) phenylcarbazolyl group, diphenylcarbazole-9-yl group, phenylcarbazole-9-yl group, phenyltriazinyl group, biphenylylt A riazinyl group, a diphenyltriazinyl group, a phenyldibenzofuranyl group, a phenyldibenzothiophenyl group and the like.

In the present specification, the carbazolyl group is specifically any of the following groups unless otherwise described in the present specification.

In the present specification, the (9-phenyl) carbazolyl group is specifically any of the following groups unless otherwise described in the present specification.

In the general formulas (TEMP-Cz1) to (TEMP-Cz9), * represents a binding position.

In the present specification, the dibenzofuranyl group and the dibenzothiophenyl group are specifically any of the following groups unless otherwise described in the present specification.

In the general formulas (TEMP-34) to (TEMP-41), * represents a binding position.

The substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups described herein are preferably methyl groups, ethyl groups, propyl groups, isopropyl groups, n-butyl groups, isobutyl groups, and t-, unless otherwise stated herein. It is a butyl group or the like.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted arylene group"
Unless otherwise stated, the "substituted or unsubstituted arylene group" described herein is derived by removing one hydrogen atom on the aryl ring from the above "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" 2 It is the basis of the value. As a specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted arylene group" (specific example group G12), by removing one hydrogen atom on the aryl ring from the "substituted or unsubstituted aryl group" described in the specific example group G1. Examples include the induced divalent group.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group"
Unless otherwise stated, the "substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group" described in the present specification shall exclude one hydrogen atom on the heterocycle from the above "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group". It is a divalent group derived by. As a specific example (specific example group G13) of the "substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group", one hydrogen on the heterocycle from the "substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2. Examples thereof include a divalent group derived by removing an atom.

-"Substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group"
Unless otherwise stated, the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group" described herein is derived by removing one hydrogen atom on the alkyl chain from the above "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" 2 It is the basis of the value. As a specific example of the "substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group" (specific example group G14), by removing one hydrogen atom on the alkyl chain from the "substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group" described in the specific example group G3. Examples include the induced divalent group.

The substituted or unsubstituted arylene group described in the present specification is preferably any group of the following general formulas (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-68) unless otherwise described in the present specification.

In the general formula (TEMP-42) ~ (TEMP -52), Q 1 ~ Q 10 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
In the general formulas (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-52), * represents a binding position.

In the general formula (TEMP-53) ~ (TEMP -62), Q 1 ~ Q 10 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Wherein Q ₉ and Q ₁₀ may be bonded to each other to form a ring via a single bond.
In the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-62), * represents a binding position.

In the general formula (TEMP-63) ~ (TEMP -68), Q 1 ~ Q 8 are each independently hydrogen atom or a substituent.
In the general formulas (TEMP-63) to (TEMP-68), * represents a binding position.

The substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group described in the present specification is preferably a group according to any of the following general formulas (TEMP-69) to (TEMP-102), unless otherwise described in the present specification. Is.

In the general formula (TEMP-69) ~ (TEMP -82), Q 1 ~ Q 9 are independently a hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the general formula (TEMP-83) ~ (TEMP -102), Q 1 ~ Q 8 are each independently hydrogen atom or a substituent.

The above is the explanation of "substituents described in the present specification".

・ "When combining to form a ring"
In the present specification, "one or more sets of two or more adjacent pairs are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring. "Forming or not binding to each other" means "one or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle" and "adjacent". One or more pairs of two or more pairs are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and one or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs are not bonded to each other. "When and means.
In the present specification, "one or more sets of two or more adjacent sets are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle", and "one of two or more adjacent sets". Regarding the case where a pair or more are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring (hereinafter, these cases may be collectively referred to as "a case where they are combined to form a ring"), the following ,explain. The case of the anthracene compound represented by the following general formula (TEMP-103) in which the mother skeleton is an anthracene ring will be described as an example.

For example, in the case _{of "one or more sets of two or more adjacent sets of R 921} to R ₉₃₀ are combined with each other to form a ring", the set of two adjacent sets is one set. Is _{a pair of R 921} and R ₉₂₂ , a pair of R ₉₂₂ and R ₉₂₃ , a pair of R ₉₂₃ and R ₉₂₄ , a pair of R ₉₂₄ and R ₉₃₀ , a pair of R ₉₃₀ and R _925, and a pair of R ₉₂₅ . The pair with R ₉₂₆ , the pair with R ₉₂₆ and R ₉₂₇ , the pair with R ₉₂₇ and R ₉₂₈ , the pair with R ₉₂₈ and R _929, and the pair with R ₉₂₉ and R ₉₂₁ .

The above-mentioned "one or more sets" means that two or more sets of two or more adjacent sets may form a ring at the same time. For example, when R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ are coupled to each other to form ring Q _A, and at the same time R ₉₂₅ and R ₉₂₆ are coupled to each other to form ring Q _B , the above general formula (TEMP-103) is used. The anthracene compound represented is represented by the following general formula (TEMP-104).

The case where "a pair consisting of two or more adjacent" forms a ring is not only the case where a pair consisting of adjacent "two" is combined as in the above example, but also from the adjacent "three or more". Including the case where the pairs are combined. For example, R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ combine with each other _{to form a ring Q A} , and R ₉₂₂ and R ₉₂₃ combine with each other _{to form a ring Q C,} and three adjacent to each other (R ₉₂₁ , R). _It means a case where a set consisting of 922 and R ₉₂₃ ) is bonded to each other to form a ring and condensed on an anthracene mother skeleton. In this case, the anthracene compound represented by the general formula (TEMP-103) is described below. It is represented by the general formula (TEMP-105). In the following general formula (TEMP-105), ring Q _A and ring Q _C share R _922.

The formed "monocycle" or "condensed ring" may be a saturated ring or an unsaturated ring as the structure of only the formed ring. Even when "one set of two adjacent sets" forms a "monocycle" or "condensed ring", the "monocycle" or "condensed ring" is a saturated ring or a saturated ring. An unsaturated ring can be formed. For example, the general formula (TEMP-104) Ring _{Q A} and ring _{Q B} formed in respectively the "monocyclic" or "fused rings". _{Further, the ring Q A} and the ring Q _C formed in the general formula (TEMP-105) are “condensed rings”. _{The ring Q A} and the ring Q _{C of the} general formula (TEMP-105) are condensed rings by condensing the ring Q _A and the ring Q _C. _{If the ring Q A of the} general formula (TMEP-104) is a benzene ring, the ring Q _A is a monocyclic ring. _{If the ring Q A of the} general formula (TMEP-104) is a naphthalene ring, the ring Q _A is a fused ring.

The "unsaturated ring" means an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle. By "saturated ring" is meant an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring or a non-aromatic heterocycle.
Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a structure in which the group given as a specific example in the specific example group G1 is terminated by a hydrogen atom.
Specific examples of the aromatic heterocycle include a structure in which the aromatic heterocyclic group given as a specific example in the specific example group G2 is terminated by a hydrogen atom.
Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include a structure in which the group given as a specific example in the specific example group G6 is terminated by a hydrogen atom.
"Forming a ring" means forming a ring with only a plurality of atoms in the mother skeleton, or with a plurality of atoms in the mother skeleton and one or more arbitrary elements. For example, the shown in the general formula _(TEMP-104), the ring _{Q A} where the _{R 921} and _{R 922} are bonded formed with each _other, the carbon atoms of the anthracene _{skeleton R 921} are _{attached, anthracene R 922} are bonded It means a ring formed by a carbon atom of a skeleton and one or more arbitrary elements. As a specific _example, in the case of forming the ring _{Q A} in the _{R 921} and _{R _922,} and the carbon atoms of the anthracene _{skeleton R 921} are _attached, the carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton and _{R 922} are attached, four carbon atoms When forming a monocyclic unsaturated ring with and, the ring formed by R ₉₂₁ and R ₉₂₂ is a benzene ring.

Here, "arbitrary element" is preferably at least one element selected from the group consisting of carbon element, nitrogen element, oxygen element, and sulfur element, unless otherwise described in the present specification. In any element (for example, in the case of carbon element or nitrogen element), the bond that does not form a ring may be terminated with a hydrogen atom or the like, or may be substituted with an "arbitrary substituent" described later. When containing any element other than the carbon element, the ring formed is a heterocycle.
Unless otherwise described herein, the number of "one or more arbitrary elements" constituting the monocyclic ring or condensed ring is preferably 2 or more and 15 or less, and more preferably 3 or more and 12 or less. , More preferably 3 or more and 5 or less.
Unless otherwise described herein, the "monocycle" and the "condensed ring" are preferably "monocycles".
Unless otherwise described herein, the "saturated ring" and the "unsaturated ring" are preferably "unsaturated rings".
Unless otherwise stated herein, the "monocycle" is preferably a benzene ring.
Unless otherwise stated herein, the "unsaturated ring" is preferably a benzene ring.
When "one or more sets of two or more adjacent pairs""bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle", or "bond to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring". In the case of "forming", unless otherwise described herein, preferably one or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs are bonded to each other to form a plurality of atoms in the mother skeleton and one or more 15 elements. It forms a substituted or unsubstituted "unsaturated ring" consisting of at least one element selected from the group consisting of the following carbon element, nitrogen element, oxygen element, and sulfur element.

When the above-mentioned "monocycle" or "condensed ring" has a substituent, the substituent is, for example, an "arbitrary substituent" described later. Specific examples of the substituent when the above-mentioned "monocycle" or "condensed ring" has a substituent are the substituents described in the above-mentioned "Substituents described in the present specification" section.
When the above-mentioned "saturated ring" or "unsaturated ring" has a substituent, the substituent is, for example, an "arbitrary substituent" described later. Specific examples of the substituent when the above-mentioned "monocycle" or "condensed ring" has a substituent are the substituents described in the above-mentioned "Substituents described in the present specification" section.
The above is the case where "one or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs are combined with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle" and "one or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs". However, it is a description of the case of "bonding to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring"("the case of bonding to form a ring").

Substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" In one embodiment of the present specification, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" (referred to as "arbitrary substituent" in the present specification). ), For example,
Unsubstituted alkyl groups with 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group with 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ),
-O- (R ₉₀₄ ),
-S- (R ₉₀₅ ),
-N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ),
Halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group,
It is a group selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having an unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50 and a heterocyclic group having an unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 5 to 50.
Here, R ₉₀₁ to R ₉₀₇ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.
If there are two or more R _901s _{, the two or more R 901s} are the same or different from each other.
If there are two or more R _902s _{, the two or more R 902s} are the same or different from each other.
If there are two or more R _903s _{, the two or more R 903s} are the same or different from each other.
If there are two or more R _904s _{, the two or more R 904s} are the same or different from each other.
If there are two or more R _905s _{, the two or more R 905s} are the same or different from each other.
If there are two or more R- _906s , the two or more R- _906s are the same or different from each other.
When _{two or more R 907s} are present, the two or more R _907s are the same as or different from each other.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" is
Alkyl groups with 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is a group selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having 6 to 50 ring-forming carbon atoms and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring-forming atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" is
Alkyl groups with 1 to 18 carbon atoms,
It is a group selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having 6 to 18 ring-forming carbon atoms and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring-forming atoms.

Specific examples of each of the above-mentioned arbitrary substituents are specific examples of the substituents described in the above-mentioned "Substituents described in the present specification" section.

Unless otherwise stated herein, any adjacent substituents may form a "saturated ring" or an "unsaturated ring", preferably a substituted or unsubstituted saturated 5 It forms a membered ring, a substituted or unsubstituted saturated 6-membered ring, a substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated 5-membered ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted unsaturated 6-membered ring, more preferably a benzene ring. To do.
Unless otherwise stated herein, any substituent may further have a substituent. The substituent further possessed by the arbitrary substituent is the same as that of the above-mentioned arbitrary substituent.

In the present specification, the numerical range represented by using "AA to BB" has the numerical value AA described before "AA to BB" as the lower limit value and the numerical value BB described after "AA to BB". Means the range including as the upper limit value.

[First Embodiment]
(Organic electroluminescence element)
The organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment is arranged between the anode, the cathode, the first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode, and the first light emitting layer and the cathode. It also has a second light emitting layer. The first light emitting layer has at least one group represented by the following general formula (11) and contains the first compound represented by the following general formula (1) as a first host material. The second light emitting layer contains a second compound represented by the following general formula (2) as a second host material. In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other.
The organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment has an anode, a first light emitting layer, a second light emitting layer, and a cathode in this order.

In the present specification, the layer structure in which the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other is, for example, any one of the following aspects (LS1), (LS2) and (LS3). Aspects may also be included.
(LS1) In the process of vapor deposition of the compound related to the first light emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light emitting layer, a region in which both the first compound and the second compound coexist is generated. A mode in which the region exists at the interface between the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer.
(LS2) When the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer contain a luminescent compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the first light emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light emitting layer are performed. An embodiment in which a region in which a first compound, a second compound, and a luminescent compound coexist is generated in the process, and the region exists at an interface between the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer.
(LS3) When the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer contain a luminescent compound, the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the first light emitting layer and the step of vapor deposition of the compound related to the second light emitting layer are performed. In the process, a region composed of the luminescent compound, a region composed of the first compound, or a region composed of the second compound is generated, and the region exists at the interface between the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer. Aspects to be performed.

In the present specification, the "host material" is, for example, a material contained in "50% by mass or more of the layer". Therefore, for example, the first light emitting layer contains the first compound represented by the following general formula (1) in an amount of 50% by mass or more of the total mass of the first light emitting layer. The second light emitting layer contains, for example, a second compound represented by the following general formula (2) in an amount of 50% by mass or more of the total mass of the second light emitting layer.

(Emission wavelength of organic EL element)
The organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment preferably emits light having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less when the device is driven.
The main peak wavelength of the light emitted by the organic EL element when the element is driven is measured as follows. The spectral radiance spectrum when a voltage is applied to the organic EL element so that the current density is 10 mA / cm ^{2 is measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta).} In the obtained spectral radiance spectrum, the peak wavelength of the emission spectrum having the maximum emission intensity is measured, and this is defined as the main peak wavelength (unit: nm).

The organic EL element according to the present embodiment may have one or more organic layers in addition to the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer. Examples of the organic layer include at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, a light emitting layer, an electron injection layer, an electron transport layer, a hole barrier layer and an electron barrier layer. Be done.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the organic layer may be composed of only the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer, and for example, a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, and an electron injection layer. It may further have at least one layer selected from the group consisting of an electron transport layer, a hole barrier layer, an electron barrier layer, and the like.

(Hole transport layer)
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is preferable to have a hole transport layer between the anode and the first light emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is preferable to have an electron transport layer between the cathode and the second light emitting layer.

FIG. 1 shows a schematic configuration of an example of an organic EL device according to the present embodiment.
The organic EL element 1 includes a translucent substrate 2, an anode 3, a cathode 4, and an organic layer 10 arranged between the anode 3 and the cathode 4. The organic layer 10 includes a hole injection layer 6, a hole transport layer 7, a first light emitting layer 51, a second light emitting layer 52, an electron transport layer 8, and an electron injection layer 9 in this order from the anode 3 side. It is constructed by stacking in order.

(First compound)
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the first compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (1).

(In the first compound according to the present embodiment, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ , R ₉₀₇ , R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R ₉₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 901} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 902} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 903} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₄ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 904} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₅ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 905} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₆ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 906} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₇ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 907} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} may or different are identical to one another. )

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (11) is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (111).

(In the general formula (111),
X ₁ is CR ₁₂₃ R ₁₂₄ , oxygen atom, sulfur atom, or NR ₁₂₅ .
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
ma is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
ma + mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
Ar ₁₀₁ is synonymous with _{Ar 101} in the general formula (11).
R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mc is 3,
The three R _121s are the same as or different from each other,
md is 3
The three R _122s are the same as or different from each other. )

At any one position of * 1 to * 4 among the positions of carbon atoms * 1 to * 8 in the ring structure represented by the following general formula (111a) in the group represented by the general formula (111). L ₁₁₁ _{is bonded, R 121} is bonded to the remaining three positions of * 1 to * 4 _{, L 112} is bonded to any one position of * 5 to * 8, and the remaining of * 5 to * 8 is connected. _{R 122} joins at three positions.

For example, in a group represented by the general formula _{(111), L 111} is bonded to either position * 2 carbon atoms in the ring structure represented by the general formula _{(111a), L 112 is} the general formula ( When bonded to the position of the carbon atom of * 7 in the ring structure represented by 111a), the group represented by the general formula (111) is represented by the following general formula (111b).

(In the general formula (111b),
X ₁ , L ₁₁₁ , L ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ _{are independently X 1} , L ₁₁₁ , L in the general formula (111). Synonymous with ₁₁₂ , ma, mb, Ar ₁₀₁ , R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R _125.
A plurality of R _121s are the same as or different from each other.
A plurality of R _122s are the same as or different from each other. )

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the group represented by the general formula (111) is preferably the group represented by the general formula (111b).

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
ma is 0, 1 or 2,
The mb is preferably 0, 1 or 2.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
ma is 0 or 1 and
The mb is preferably 0 or 1.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, Ar ₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
Ar ₁₀₁ is
Substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group,
Substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl groups,
Substituted or unsubstituted biphenyl groups,
Substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group,
Substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl groups,
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenanthryl group or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
It is also preferable that Ar ₁₀₁ is a group represented by the following general formula (12), general formula (13) or general formula (14).

(In the general formula (12), the general formula (13) and the general formula (14),
R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by C (= O) R _124,
-A group represented by _{COOR 125,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
* In the general formula (12), the general formula (13) and the general formula (14) _{is the connection position with the L 101} in the general formula (11), or the general formula (111) or the general formula (111b). ) Indicates the connection position with _{L 112.} )

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the first compound is preferably represented by the following general formula (101).

(In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 101,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _101.
L ₁₀₁ is
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
When _{two or more L 101s} are present, the two or more L _101s are the same as or different from each other. )

In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 101,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _101.
L ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
Of the one or a plurality of L _101s , at least one L ₁₀₁ is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (130) or the following general formula (140).

The groups represented by the following general formula (1L) in the general formula (101) are the following general formulas (1Lm1), (1Lm2), and (1Lm3) when mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, respectively. ), (1Lm4) or (1Lm5).

(In the general formulas (1Lm1) to (1Lm5),
L ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
The two *'s independently indicate the bonding position with the pyrene ring in the general formula (101). )

In the general formula (1 Lm1), one L ₁₀₁ is preferably a group represented by the general formula (130) or the general formula (140).
In the general formula (1Lm2) ~ (1Lm5), among the plurality of _{L 101,} at least one _{L 101} is preferably a group represented by the general formula (130) or formula (140).
When mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, as in the general formula _{(1Lm2) ~ (1Lm5),} 2 single bonds of _{L 101,} either combined with the pyrene ring, or binds to another _{L 101} ..

The organic electroluminescent device according to the present embodiment, one, or among a plurality of L _101, at least one L ₁₀₁ is also preferably a group represented by the general formula (130).

The organic electroluminescent device according to the present embodiment, one, or among a plurality of L _101, at least one L ₁₀₁ is also preferably a group represented by the general formula (140).

When the first compound contains a substituent having low flatness represented by the general formula (130) or the general formula (140) as _{L 101 in the molecule, the interaction between the host materials can be suppressed.} It can be expected that the shift of the Y value in the CIE1931 chromaticity of the organic electroluminescence device can be suppressed.

In the general formula (130), wherein any one of _R 1305 _{~ R 1308} which does not form a single ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring substituted or unsubstituted,
It is preferable that the mx is a bond position with _{another L 101} when the mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or a bond position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.

In the general formula (140), any one of the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and R ₁₄₀₅ to R ₁₄₀₈ which does not form the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring is used.
It is preferable that the mx is a bond position with _{another L 101} when the mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or a bond position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, at least one _{L 101} _{out of one or a plurality of L 101s} has the following general formulas (131A) to (131D), (132A) to (132D) and (133A). It is preferable that the group is selected from the group consisting of (133D).

(In the general formulas (131A) to (131D), (133A) to (133D) and (134A) to (134D),
One of the two * in each formula
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
The other of the two * in each equation is
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
_{One or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1301} to R ₁₃₁₆ that are not at the bonding position are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or a substituted or unsubstituted condensation. Forming rings or not binding to each other
_{The substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and R 1301} to R ₁₃₁₆ which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are independently.
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), -O- ( A group represented by R ₉₀₄ ), a group represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ . -A _{group represented by COOR 802} , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, at least one _{L 101} _{out of one or a plurality of L 101} has the following general formulas (141A) to (141D), and (143A) to (143D) and (144A). )-(144D) is preferably the group selected from the group.

(In the general formulas (141A) to (141D), (143A) to (143D) and (144A) to (144D),
One of the two * in each formula
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
The other of the two * in each equation is
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
_{One or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1401} to R ₁₄₁₈ that are not at the bonding position are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or a substituted or unsubstituted condensation. Forming rings or not binding to each other
_{The substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and R 1401} to R ₁₄₁₈ which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are independently.
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), -O- ( A group represented by R ₉₀₄ ), a group represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ . -A _{group represented by COOR 802} , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, _{one or more sets of two or more adjacent sets of R 1305} to R ₁₃₀₈ are bonded to each other and are substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic or substituted or unsubstituted. One of the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms forming a fused ring and forming the substituted or unsubstituted monocycle or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring has mx of 2, 3, 4 or 5 It is also preferable that the bonding position is one of _{the other L 101} or R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ at the time of.

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, _{one or more sets of two or more adjacent sets of R 1405} to R ₁₄₀₈ are bonded to each other and are substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic or substituted or unsubstituted. One of the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms forming a fused ring and forming the substituted or unsubstituted monocycle or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring has mx of 2, 3, 4 or 5 It is also preferable that the bonding position is one of _{the other L 101} or R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ at the time of.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, at least one _{L 101} _{out of one or a plurality of L 101s} is a group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (135A) to (135C). Is also preferable.

(In the general formulas (135A) to (135C),
One or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₁₃₀₁ to R ₁₃₀₄ and R ₁₃₀₉ to R ₁₃₁₆ combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or substituted or unsubstituted. Forming fused rings or not binding to each other
R ₁₃₀₁ , R ₁₃₀₃ or R ₁₃₀₄
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
One of R ₁₃₀₅ to R ₁₃₀₈ and R ₁₃₁₇ to R ₁₃₂₀
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
_{R 1301} that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, does not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and is not a bonding position with _{L 101} , R ₁₀₁ to R _110, and R ₁₁₁ to R _120. ~ R ₁₃₂₀ are independent of each other
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), -O- ( A group represented by R ₉₀₄ ), a group represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ . -A _{group represented by COOR 802} , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, at least one _{L 101} _{out of one or a plurality of L 101s} is a group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (145A) to (145C). Is also preferable.

(In the general formulas (145A) to (145C),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₀₄ and R ₁₄₀₉ to R ₁₄₁₈ combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or substituted or unsubstituted. Forming fused rings or not binding to each other
R ₁₄₀₁ , R ₁₄₀₃ or R ₁₄₀₄
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 101} to R _110.
One of R ₁₄₀₅ to R ₁₄₀₈ and R ₁₄₁₉ to R ₁₄₂₂
It is the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of _{R 111} to R _120.
_{R 1401} that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, does not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and is not a bonding position with _{L 101} , R ₁₀₁ to R _110, and R ₁₁₁ to R _120. ~ R ₁₄₂₂ are independent of each other
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), -O- ( A group represented by R ₉₀₄ ), a group represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ . -A _{group represented by COOR 802} , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, one of R ₁₃₁₇ to R ₁₃₂₀ is
It is also preferable that the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or _{the connection position with one of R 111} to R _120.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, one of R ₁₄₁₉ to R ₁₄₂₂ is
It is also preferable that the connection position with _{another L 101} when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or _{the connection position with one of R 111} to R _120.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring are not formed, and L ₁₀₁ , R ₁₀₁ to R _110, and R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ . _{R 1301} to R _{1316 and} R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₈ , which are not the coupling positions of, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
It is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring are not formed, and L ₁₀₁ , R ₁₀₁ to R _110, and R ₁₁₁ to R ₁₂₀ . _{R 1301} to R _{1316 and} R ₁₄₀₁ to R ₁₄₁₈ , which are not the coupling positions of, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms or substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms are preferable.

In the general formula (101),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 101,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _101.
L ₁₀₁ is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L ₁₀₁ is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{L 101} may be identical to each other or different,
It is also preferred that at least one L ₁₀₁ is any group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to (TEMP-62). ..

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, the first compound is preferably represented by the following general formula (1010).

(In the general formula (1010), R ₁₀₁ , R ₁₀₂ , R ₁₀₄ to R ₁₁₉ , L _101, and mx are synonymous with the definitions in the general formula (101), respectively.)

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, the first compound is preferably represented by any of the following general formulas (1011) to (1015).

(In the general formulas (1011) to (1015), R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ , L _101, and mx are synonymous with the definitions in the general formula (101), respectively.)

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, the mx is preferably 1, 2, or 3.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, mx is preferably 1.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, it is preferable that R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are not substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl groups, and L ₁₀₁ does not contain a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylene group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is also preferable that the substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" does not contain a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group.
In one embodiment, the first compound is a compound having only one pyrene ring in the molecule (sometimes referred to as a monopyrene compound).
In one embodiment, the first compound is a compound having only two pyrene rings in the molecule (sometimes referred to as a bispirene compound).

In the organic electroluminescence element according to the present embodiment, _{R 101} to R ₁₂₀ , which are not the bonding positions with _{L 101} , are independently hydrogen atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or absent. Substitutable ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number 6 to 50 aryl group, or substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atomic number 5 to 50 heterocyclic group. Is preferable.

In the organic electroluminescence element according to the present embodiment, _{R 101} to R ₁₂₀ , which are not the bonding positions with _{L 101} , are independently hydrogen atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or substituted or substituted. It is preferably an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms.

In the organic electroluminescence device according to the present embodiment, _{R 101} to R ₁₂₀ , which are not the bonding positions with _{L 101} , are preferably hydrogen atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, L ₁₀₁ is preferably a single-bonded, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to this embodiment, one, or among a plurality of _{L 101,} at least one _{L 101} is preferably a group represented by the general formula (130).

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, at least one _{L 101} _{out of one or a plurality of L 101s} has the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to ( It is also preferable that it is any group selected from the group consisting of TEMP-62).

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
The first compound is also preferably represented by the following general formula (102).

(In the general formula (102),
R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₂₀ are independently synonymous with _{R 101} to R ₁₂₀ in the general formula (101).
However, one of R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ indicates the connection position with _{L 111,} and one of _{R 111} to R ₁₂₀ indicates the connection position with L _112.
X ₁ is CR ₁₂₃ R ₁₂₄ , oxygen atom, sulfur atom, or NR ₁₂₅ .
L ₁₁₁ and L ₁₁₂ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
ma is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
ma + mb is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4,
R ₁₂₁ , R ₁₂₂ , R ₁₂₃ , R ₁₂₄ and R ₁₂₅ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mc is 3,
The three R _121s are the same as or different from each other,
md is 3
The three R _122s are the same as or different from each other. )

In the compound represented by the general formula (102), ma is preferably 0, 1 or 2, and mb is preferably 0, 1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the general formula (102), ma is preferably 0 or 1, and mb is preferably 0 or 1.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, _{it is preferable that two or more of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ are groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, _{two or more of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ are groups represented by the general formula (11), and Ar ₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon. It is preferably an aryl group having a number of 6 to 50.

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, Ar ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group, and L ₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylene group, but a group represented by the general formula (11). The substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms as R ₁₀₁ to R _{110 is preferably not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl group.}

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ , which are not groups represented by the general formula (11), are independently hydrogen atoms and substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms. , A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50 aryl groups, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atomic number of 5 to 50 heterocycles. It is preferably a group.

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, R ₁₀₁ to R ₁₁₀ , which are not groups represented by the general formula (11), are independently hydrogen atoms and substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms. , Or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms is preferable.

_{In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, R 101} to R ₁₁₀ , which are not groups represented by the general formula (11), are preferably hydrogen atoms.

In the first compound and the second compound, the groups described as "substituted or unsubstituted" are preferably "unsubstituted" groups.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, two of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) are groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, three of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) are groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, four of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) are groups represented by the general formula (11).

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), and mx is 1 or more.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is substituted. Alternatively, it is an unsubstituted aryl group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is substituted. Alternatively, it is a heterocyclic group containing an unsubstituted nitrogen atom.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is substituted. Alternatively, it is a heterocyclic group containing an unsubstituted sulfur atom.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is substituted. Or an unsubstituted frill group,
Oxazolyl group,
Isooxazolyl group,
Oxaziazolyl group,
Xanthenyl group,
Benzofuranyl group,
Isobenzofuranyl group,
Dibenzofuranyl group,
Benzodiazepine group,
Benzoisoxazolyl group,
Phenoxadinyl group,
Morpholine group,
Ginaftfuranyl group,
Azadibenzofuranyl group,
Diazadibenzofuranyl group,
Azanaftbenzofuranyl group and diazanaphthobenzofuranyl group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is absent. Substitute frill group,
Oxazolyl group,
Isooxazolyl group,
Oxaziazolyl group,
Xanthenyl group,
Benzofuranyl group,
Isobenzofuranyl group,
Dibenzofuranyl group,
Benzodiazepine group,
Benzoisoxazolyl group,
Phenoxadinyl group,
Morpholine group,
Ginaftfuranyl group,
Azadibenzofuranyl group,
Diazadibenzofuranyl group,
At least one group selected from the group consisting of azanaphthobenzofuranyl groups and diazanaphthobenzofuranyl groups.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is substituted. Alternatively, it is an unsubstituted dibenzofuranyl group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
_{For example, one of R 101} to R ₁₁₀ in the first compound represented by the general formula (1) is a group represented by the general formula (11), mx is 0, and Ar ₁₀₁ is absent. It is a substituted dibenzofuranyl group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
For example, mx in the first compound represented by the general formula (101) is 2 or more.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
For example, mx in the first compound represented by the general formula (101) is 1 or more, and L ₁₀₁ is an arylene group having 6 to 24 ring-forming carbon atoms or a divalent ring-forming atom number of 5 to 24. It is a heterocyclic group of.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
For example, mx in the first compound represented by the general formula (101) is 1 or more, and L ₁₀₁ is an arylene group having 6 to 18 ring-forming carbon atoms or a divalent ring-forming atom number of 5 to 18. It is a heterocyclic group of.

(Method for producing the first compound)
The first compound can be produced by a known method. The first compound can also be produced by following a known method and using known alternative reactions and raw materials suitable for the desired product.

(Specific example of the first compound)
Specific examples of the first compound include the following compounds. However, the present invention is not limited to specific examples of these first compounds.

(Second compound)
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the second compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (2).

(In the general formula (2),
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

(In the second compound according to the present embodiment, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ , R ₉₀₇ , R ₈₀₁ and R ₈₀₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R ₉₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 901} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 902} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 903} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₄ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 904} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₅ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 905} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₆ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 906} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₇ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 907} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} may or different are identical to one another. )

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group,
-A group represented by _{COOR 802,}
Halogen atom,
It is a cyano group or a nitro group,
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
It is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
L ₂₀₁ and L ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
A single-bonded, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
It is preferable that Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
Ar ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₂ are independent of each other.
Phenyl group,
Naphthalene group,
Phenantril group,
Biphenyl group,
Terphenyl group,
Diphenylfluorenyl group,
Dimethylfluorenyl group,
Benzodiphenylfluorenyl group,
Benzodiazepine fluorenyl group,
Dibenzofuranyl group,
Dibenzothienyl group,
It is preferably a naphthobenzofuranyl group or a naphthobenzothienyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is the following general formula (201), general formula (202), general formula (203), general formula (204). , The compound represented by the general formula (205), the general formula (206), the general formula (207), the general formula (208) or the general formula (209) is preferable.

(In the general formulas (201) to (209),
L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ are synonymous with _{L 201} and Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2).
R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 201} to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2). )

The second compound represented by the general formula (2) includes the following general formula (221), general formula (222), general formula (223), general formula (224), general formula (225), and general formula (22). It is also preferable that the compound is represented by the general formula (227), the general formula (228) or the general formula (229).

(The general formula (221), the general formula (222), the general formula (223), the general formula (224), the general formula (225), the general formula (226), the general formula (227), the general formula (228) and In the general formula (229),
R _{201 and} R ₂₀₃ to R ₂₀₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 201 and} R ₂₀₃ to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2).
L ₂₀₁ and Ar ₂₀₁ are synonymous with _{L 201} and Ar ₂₀₁ in the general formula (2), respectively.
L ₂₀₃ is synonymous with _{L 201} in the general formula (2).
L ₂₀₃ and L ₂₀₁ are the same as or different from each other,
Ar ₂₀₃ is synonymous with _{Ar 201} in the general formula (2).
Ar ₂₀₃ and Ar ₂₀₁ are the same as or different from each other. )

The second compound represented by the general formula (2) is the following general formula (241), general formula (242), general formula (243), general formula (244), general formula (245), general formula (24). 246), it is also preferable that it is a compound represented by the general formula (247), the general formula (248) or the general formula (249).

(The general formula (241), the general formula (242), the general formula (243), the general formula (244), the general formula (245), the general formula (246), the general formula (247), the general formula (248) and In the general formula (249)
R ₂₀₁ , R _{202 and} R ₂₀₄ to R ₂₀₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 201} , R _{202 and} R ₂₀₄ to R ₂₀₈ in the general formula (2).
L ₂₀₃ is synonymous with _{L 201} in the general formula (2).
L ₂₀₃ and L ₂₀₁ are the same as or different from each other,
Ar ₂₀₃ is synonymous with _{Ar 201} in the general formula (2).
Ar ₂₀₃ and Ar ₂₀₁ are the same as or different from each other. )

Among the second compounds represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are not groups represented by the general formula (21), are independently.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or a group represented by _{−Si (R 901} ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _{903) is preferable.}

L ₁₀₁ is
A single-bonded or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 22 carbon atoms.
Ar ₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 22 carbon atoms.

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, among the second compounds represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents of the anthracene skeleton, suppress the interaction between molecules. A hydrogen atom is preferable from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in electron mobility and suppressing a decrease in electron mobility. However, R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 ring-forming carbon atoms, or substituted or absent. Substituent ring-forming A heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms may be used.
When R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are bulk substituents such as an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group, the interaction between the molecules is suppressed and the electron mobility is reduced with respect to the first compound, and the following formula (described later) There is a risk that the relationship of μH2> μH1 described in Equation 3) will not be satisfied. When the second compound is used in the second light emitting layer, by satisfying the relationship of μH2> μH1, the recombination ability between holes and electrons in the first light emitting layer is lowered, and the luminous efficiency is lowered. It can be expected to be suppressed. The substituents include a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, _{a group represented by -Si (R 901} ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), a group represented by -O- (R ₉₀₄ ), and-. The group represented by S- (R ₉₀₅ ), the group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), the aralkyl group, the group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ and the group represented by -COOR ₈₀₂ . The groups to be treated, halogen atoms, cyano groups, and nitro groups may be bulky, and the alkyl groups and cycloalkyl groups may be further bulky.
Among the second compounds represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents of the anthracene skeleton, are preferably not bulky substituents and are not alkyl groups or cycloalkyl groups. Preferably, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, _{a group represented by -Si (R 901} ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ), a group represented by -O- (R ₉₀₄ ). , -S- (R ₉₀₅ ) group, -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ) group, aralkyl group, -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ group, -COOR ₈₀₂ More preferably, it is not a group represented by, a halogen atom, a cyano group, and a nitro group.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or _{a group represented by −Si (R 901} ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ) is also preferable.

In the organic EL element according to this embodiment
Among the second compounds represented by the general formula (2), R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ are preferably hydrogen atoms.

In the second compound, the _{substituents in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in R 201} to R ₂₀₈ are the above-mentioned potentially bulky substituents, particularly substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups, and substituted or substituted groups. It is also preferable that it does not contain an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group. The _{substituent in the case of "substituted or unsubstituted" in R 201} to R ₂₀₈ does not contain a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group and a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group, whereby an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, etc. It is possible to prevent the interaction between molecules due to the presence of a bulky substituent from being suppressed, prevent a decrease in electron mobility, and to apply such a second compound to the second light emitting layer. When used, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recombining ability between holes and electrons in the first light emitting layer and a decrease in light emission efficiency.

_{It is more preferable that R 201} to R _208, which are substituents of the anthracene skeleton, are not bulky substituents, and R ₂₀₁ to R ₂₀₈ , which are substituents, are unsubstituted. _{Further, when R 201} to R ₂₀₈ which are substituents of the anthracene skeleton are not bulky substituents _{and the substituents are bonded to R 201} to R ₂₀₈ which are not bulky substituents, the substituents are also bulky. It is preferable that it is not a substituent, and the substituent _{bonded to R 201} to R ₂₀₈ as a substituent is preferably not an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a haloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, Alkinyl group, -Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R ₉₀₃ ) group, -O- (R ₉₀₄ ) group, -S- (R ₉₀₅ ) group,- Group represented by N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), aralkyl group, group represented by -C (= O) R ₈₀₁ , group represented by -COOR ₈₀₂ , halogen atom, cyano group, and nitro group. It is more preferable that it is not.

In the second compound, the groups described as "substituted or unsubstituted" are preferably "unsubstituted" groups.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuranyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is an unsubstituted dibenzofuranyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, the second compound represented by the general formula (2) E has at least one hydrogen, and at least one of the hydrogens is deuterium.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, L ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is TEMP-63 to TEMP-68.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is a substituted or unsubstituted anthryl group.
Benzoanthril group,
Phenantril group,
Benzophenanthryl group,
Fenarenyl group,
Pyrenyl group,
Chrysenyl group,
Benzocrisenyl group,
Triphenylenyl group,
Benzodiazepineyl group,
Tetrasenyl group,
Pentacenyl group,
Fluorantenyl group,
At least one group selected from the group consisting of benzofluoranthenyl groups and perylenel groups.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is a substituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is a substituted or unsubstituted xanthenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, for example, Ar ₂₀₁ in the second compound represented by the general formula (2) is a benzoxanthenyl group.

(Method for producing the second compound)
The second compound can be produced by a known method. The second compound can also be produced by following a known method and using a known alternative reaction and raw material suitable for the desired product.

(Specific example of the second compound)
Specific examples of the second compound include the following compounds. However, the present invention is not limited to specific examples of these second compounds.

(Third compound and fourth compound)
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is also preferable that the first light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent third compound.
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is also preferable that the second light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent fourth compound.
When the first light emitting layer contains the third compound and the second light emitting layer contains the fourth compound, the third compound and the fourth compound are the same as or different from each other.

The third compound and the fourth compound are independent of each other.
Compounds represented by the following general formula (3),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (4),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (5),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (6),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (7),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (8),
One or more compounds selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the following general formula (9) and the compound represented by the following general formula (10).

(Compound represented by the general formula (3))
The compound represented by the general formula (3) will be described.

(In the general formula (3),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₃₀₁ to R ₃₁₀
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
At _{least one of R 301} to R ₃₁₀ is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (31).
_{R 301} to R ₃₁₀ , which do not form the monocyclic ring, do not form the condensed ring, and are not monovalent groups represented by the following general formula (31), are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

(In the general formula (31),
Ar ₃₀₁ and Ar ₃₀₂ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L ₃₀₁ to L ₃₀₃ are independent of each other,
Single bond,
It is an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.
* Indicates the bonding position in the pyrene ring in the general formula (3). )

Of the third and fourth compounds, R ₉₀₁ , R ₉₀₂ , R ₉₀₃ , R ₉₀₄ , R ₉₀₅ , R ₉₀₆ and R ₉₀₇ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₉₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 901} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 902} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 903} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₄ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 904} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₅ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 905} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₆ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 906} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₉₀₇ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 907} may or different are identical to one another.

In the general formula (3), _{it is preferable that two of R 301} to R ₃₁₀ are groups represented by the general formula (31).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (33).

(In the general formula (33),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 301} to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (31).
L ₃₁₁ to L ₃₁₆ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
It is an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In the general formula (31), L ₃₀₁ is preferably a single bond, and L ₃₀₂ _{and L 303 are preferably a single bond.}

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is represented by the following general formula (34) or general formula (35).

(In the general formula (34),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 301} to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (31).
L ₃₁₂ , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ and L ₃₁₆ are independently synonymous with _{L 312} , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ and L ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33).
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ are independently synonymous with _{Ar 312} , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33), respectively. )

(In the general formula (35),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 301} to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (31).
Ar ₃₁₂ , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ are independently synonymous with _{Ar 312} , Ar ₃₁₃ , Ar ₃₁₅ and Ar ₃₁₆ in the general formula (33), respectively. )

In the general formula (31), preferably, _{at least one of Ar 301} and Ar ₃₀₂ is a group represented by the following general formula (36).
In the general formulas (33) to (35), preferably _{at least one of Ar 312} and Ar ₃₁₃ is a group represented by the following general formula (36).
In the general formulas (33) to (35), preferably _{at least one of Ar 315} and Ar ₃₁₆ is a group represented by the following general formula (36).

(In the general formula (36),
X ₃ represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 321} to R ₃₂₇ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
* Indicates the connection position with _{L 302} , L ₃₀₃ , L ₃₁₂ , L ₃₁₃ , L ₃₁₅ or L _316. )

X ₃ is preferably an oxygen atom.

At least one of _{R 321} to R ₃₂₇
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.

In the general formula (31), it _{is preferable that Ar 301} is a group represented by the general formula (36) and Ar ₃₀₂ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
In the general formulas (33) to (35), Ar ₃₁₂ is a group represented by the general formula (36), and Ar ₃₁₃ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms. It is preferable to have.
In the general formulas (33) to (35), Ar ₃₁₅ is a group represented by the general formula (36), and Ar ₃₁₆ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms. It is preferable to have.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (3) is represented by the following general formula (37).

(In the general formula (37),
R ₃₁₁ to R ₃₁₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 301} to R ₃₁₀ in the general formula (3), which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (31).
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₃₂₁ to R ₃₂₇
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₃₄₁ to R ₃₄₇
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 321} to R _{327 and} R ₃₄₁ to R ₃₄₇ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
R ₃₃₁ to R _{335 and} R ₃₅₁ to R ₃₅₅ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (3) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by the general formula (4))
The compound represented by the general formula (4) will be described.

(In the general formula (4),
Z is independently a CRa or nitrogen atom,
The A1 ring and the A2 ring are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocycle having 5 to 50 atomic atoms.
When there are a plurality of Ras, one or more pairs of two or more adjacent Ras among the plurality of Ras may be present.
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
n21 and n22 are 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, respectively.
When there are a plurality of Rbs, one or more sets of two or more adjacent Rbs among the plurality of Rbs may be present.
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
When there are a plurality of Rc, one or more of a pair consisting of two or more adjacent Rc among the plurality of Rc
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
Ra, Rb, and Rc, which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "aryl group".
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring contains two carbon atoms on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (4) as ring-forming atoms.
Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms" include a compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.

The "heterocycle" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "heterocyclic group".
The "heterocycle" of the A1 ring and the A2 ring contains two carbon atoms on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (4) as ring-forming atoms.
Specific examples of the "heterocyclic ring having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms" include a compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.

Rb is bonded to either a carbon atom forming an aromatic hydrocarbon ring as an A1 ring or an atom forming a heterocycle as an A1 ring.

Rc is bonded to either a carbon atom forming an aromatic hydrocarbon ring as an A2 ring or an atom forming a heterocycle as an A2 ring.

Of Ra, Rb and Rc, at least one is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (4a), and at least two are more preferably a group represented by the following general formula (4a). ..

(In the general formula (4a),
L ₄₀₁ is
Single bond,
It is an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.
Ar ₄₀₁ is
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms or a group represented by the following general formula (4b). )

(In the general formula (4b),
L ₄₀₂ and L ₄₀₃ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
It is an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.
The set consisting of _{Ar 402} and Ar _{403 is}
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{Ar 402} and Ar ₄₀₃ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is represented by the following general formula (42).

(In the general formula (42),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 401} to R ₄₁₁ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

Of R ₄₀₁ to R ₄₁₁ , at least one is preferably a group represented by the general formula (4a), and more preferably at least two groups are represented by the general formula (4a).
It is preferable that R ₄₀₄ and R ₄₁₁ are groups represented by the general formula (4a).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound in which a structure represented by the following general formula (4-1) or general formula (4-2) is bound to the A1 ring.
Further, in one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (42) is represented by the following general formula (4-1) or general formula (4-2) on the ring to which _{R 404} to R _{407 are bonded.} It is a compound with a combined structure.

(In the general formula (4-1), the two *'s are independently bonded to the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring as the A1 ring of the general formula (4) or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle. Or combine with any _{of R 404} to R ₄₀₇ of the general formula (42).
Whether the three * of the general formula (4-2) are independently bonded to the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring as the A1 ring of the general formula (4) or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle. , Or in combination with any _{of R 404} to R ₄₀₇ of the general formula (42).
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 421} to R _{427 and} R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3), general formula (41-4) or general formula (41-5). ..

(In the general formula (41-3), formula (41-4) and formula (41-5),
The A1 ring is as defined by the general formula (4).
R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ are independently synonymous with _{R 421} to R ₄₂₇ in the general formula (4-1).
R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 401} to R ₄₁₁ in the general formula (42). )

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms as the A1 ring of the general formula (41-5) is
It is a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 atoms forming the ring as the A1 ring of the general formula (41-5) is a heterocycle.
Substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) or the general formula (42) is selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the following general formulas (461) to (467). ..

(Of the general formula (461), general formula (462), general formula (463), general formula (464), general formula (465), general formula (466) and general formula (467),
R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ are independently synonymous with _{R 421} to R ₄₂₇ in the general formula (4-1).
R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 431} to R ₄₃₈ in the general formula (4-2).
R ₄₄₀ to R _{448 and} R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄ are independently synonymous with _{R 401} to R ₄₁₁ in the general formula (42).
X ₄ is an oxygen atom, NR ₈₀₁ or C (R ₈₀₂ ) (R ₈₀₃ ).
_R801 , _R802 and _R803 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 803} may or different are identical to one another. )

In one embodiment, in the compound represented by the general formula (42), one or more sets of two or more adjacent pairs of _{R 401} to R _{411 are bonded to each other to be substituted or unsubstituted.} A single ring is formed or bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the embodiment will be described in detail as a compound represented by the general formula (45) below.

(Compound represented by the general formula (45))
The compound represented by the general formula (45) will be described.

(In the general formula (45),
A _{group consisting of R 461} and R ₄₆₂ , a group consisting of R ₄₆₂ and R ₄₆₃ , a group consisting of R ₄₆₄ and R ₄₆₅ , a group consisting of R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₆₆ , a group consisting of R ₄₆₆ and R ₄₆₇ , Two or more of the groups selected from the group consisting of R ₄₆₈ and R ₄₆₉ , the group consisting of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ , and the group consisting of R ₄₇₀ and R _{471 are combined with each other.} Form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,
However,
A _{set consisting of R 461} and R ₄₆₂ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₂ and R ₄₆₃ ;
A _{set consisting of R 464} and R ₄₆₅ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₆₆ ;
A _{set consisting of R 465} and R ₄₆₆ and a set consisting of R ₄₆₆ and R ₄₆₇ ;
The set of R ₄₆₈ and R ₄₆₉ and the set of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ ; and the set of R ₄₆₉ and R ₄₇₀ and the set of R ₄₇₀ and R ₄₇₁ do not form a ring at the same time. ,
Two or more rings formed by R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ are the same as or different from each other.
_{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
Groups represented by -S- (R ₉₀₅ ), -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In the general formula (45), R _n and R _{n + 1} (n represents an integer selected from 461, 462, 464 to 466, and 468 to 470) are combined with each other, and R _n and R _{n + 1} are combined 2 Together with the two ring-forming carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is formed. The ring is preferably composed of atoms selected from the group consisting of carbon atoms, oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms and nitrogen atoms, and the number of atoms in the ring is preferably 3 to 7, more preferably 5 or It is 6.

The number of the ring structures in the compound represented by the general formula (45) is, for example, 2, 3, or 4. The two or more ring structures may be present on the same benzene ring on the matrix of the general formula (45), or may be present on different benzene rings. For example, when having three ring structures, one ring structure may be present for each of the three benzene rings of the general formula (45).

Examples of the ring structure in the compound represented by the general formula (45) include structures represented by the following general formulas (451) to (460).

(In the general formulas (451) to (457),
* 1 and * 2, * 3 and * 4, * 5 and * 6, * 7 and * 8, * 9 and * 10, * 11 and * 12, and * 13 and * 14, respectively, R _n and R _{n + 1, respectively.} Represents the two ring-forming carbon atoms to which
The _{ring-forming carbon atoms to which R n} is bonded are * 1 and * 2, * 3 and * 4, * 5 and * 6, * 7 and * 8, * 9 and * 10, * 11 and * 12, and * 13. It may be either of the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by * 14.
X ₄₅ is C (R ₄₅₁₂ ) (R ₄₅₁₃ ), NR ₄₅₁₄ , oxygen atom or sulfur atom.
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₅₀₁ to R ₄₅₀₆ and R ₄₅₁₂ to R ₄₅₁₃
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 4501} to R ₄₅₁₄ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

(In the general formulas (458) to (460),
* 1 and * 2, and * 3 and * 4, respectively, represent the two ring-forming carbon atoms to which _{R n} and R _{n + 1 are bonded.}
The _{ring-forming carbon atom to which R n} is bonded may be either * 1 and * 2, or the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by * 3 and * 4.
X ₄₅ is C (R ₄₅₁₂ ) (R ₄₅₁₃ ), NR ₄₅₁₄ , oxygen atom or sulfur atom.
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₅₁₂ to R ₄₅₁₃ and R _{4515 to} R ₄₅₂₅
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 4512} to R ₄₅₁₃ , R ₄₅₁₅ to R _4521, R ₄₅₂₂ to R ₄₅₂₅ , and R ₄₅₁₄ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independently R in the general formula (45). It is synonymous with ₄₆₁ to R _471. )

In the general formula (45), _{at least one of R 462} , R ₄₆₄ , R ₄₆₅ , R ₄₇₀ and R ₄₇₁ (preferably at least one of R ₄₆₂ , R ₄₆₅ and R ₄₇₀ , more preferably R ₄₆₂ ) is used. , It is preferable that the group does not form a ring structure.

(I) In the general formula (45), the substituent when the ring structure formed by _{R n} and R _{n + 1 has a substituent,}
(Ii) In the general formula (45), R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ _{that do not form a ring structure, and R 4501} to R ₄₅₁₄ and R _{4515 to} R ₄₅₂₅ in the formulas (451) to (460) are preferable. Are independent of each other
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is either a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms, or a group selected from the group consisting of the groups represented by the following general formulas (461) to (464).

(In the general formulas (461) to (464),
R _d is independent of each other
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
X ₄₆ is C (R ₈₀₁ ) (R ₈₀₂ ), NR ₈₀₃ , oxygen atom or sulfur atom.
_R801 , _R802 and _R803 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 803} is the same or different from each other,
p1 is 5,
p2 is 4,
p3 is 3,
p4 is 7,
The * in the general formulas (461) to (464) independently indicate the bonding position with the ring structure. )
In the third compound and the fourth compound, _R901 to _R907 are as defined as described above.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-1) to (45-6).

(In the general formulas (45-1) to (45-6),
Rings d to i are independently substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic rings or substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, respectively.
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-7) to (45-12).

(In the general formulas (45-7) to (45-12),
Rings d to f, k, and j are independently substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic rings or substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, respectively.
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-13) to (45-21).

(In the general formulas (45-13) to (45-21),
Rings d to k are independently substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic rings or substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, respectively.
R ₄₆₁ to R ₄₇₁ are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45). )

Examples of the substituent when the ring g or the ring h further has a substituent include, for example.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms,
The group represented by the general formula (461),
Examples thereof include a group represented by the general formula (463) or a group represented by the general formula (464).

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by any of the following general formulas (45-22) to (45-25).

(In the general formulas (45-22) to (45-25),
X ₄₆ and X ₄₇ are independently C (R ₈₀₁ ) (R ₈₀₂ ), NR ₈₀₃ , oxygen atom or sulfur atom, respectively.
R ₄₆₁ to R _{471 and} R ₄₈₁ to R ₄₈₈ are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45).
_R801 , _R802 and _R803 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 803} may or different are identical to one another. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (45) is represented by the following general formula (45-26).

(In the general formula (45-26),
X ₄₆ is C (R ₈₀₁ ) (R ₈₀₂ ), NR ₈₀₃ , oxygen atom or sulfur atom.
R ₄₆₃ , R ₄₆₄ , R ₄₆₇ , R ₄₆₈ , R ₄₇₁ , and R ₄₈₁ to R ₄₉₂ are independently synonymous with _{R 461} to R ₄₇₁ in the general formula (45).
_R801 , _R802 and _R803 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 803} may or different are identical to one another. )

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (4) include the compounds shown below. In the specific examples below, Ph represents a phenyl group and D represents a deuterium atom.

(Compound represented by the general formula (5))
The compound represented by the general formula (5) will be described. The compound represented by the general formula (5) is a compound corresponding to the compound represented by the general formula (41-3) described above.

(In the general formula (5),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₅₀₁ to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 501} to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
R ₅₂₁ and R ₅₂₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

" _{One set of two or more adjacent sets of R 501} to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ " is, for example, a set of R ₅₀₁ and R ₅₀₂ , a set of R ₅₀₂ and R ₅₀₃ , and R. It is a combination of a set of ₅₀₃ and R ₅₀₄ , a set of R ₅₀₅ and R ₅₀₆ , a set of R ₅₀₆ and R ₅₀₇ , a set of R ₅₀₁ , R ₅₀₂ and R _{503, and the like.}

In one embodiment, at least one, preferably two _{, of R 501} to R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ to R ₅₁₇ are groups represented by _{-N (R 906} ) (R _907).

In one embodiment, R ₅₀₁ -R ₅₀₇ and R ₅₁₁ -R ₅₁₇ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (5) is a compound represented by the following general formula (52).

(In the general formula (52),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₅₃₁ to R ₅₃₄ and R ₅₄₁ to R ₅₄₄
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 531} to R ₅₃₄ , R ₅₄₁ to R ₅₄₄ , and R ₅₅₁ _{and R 552} , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
R ₅₆₁ to R ₅₆₄ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (5) is a compound represented by the following general formula (53).

(In the general formula (53), R ₅₅₁ , R ₅₅₂ and R ₅₆₁ to R ₅₆₄ are independently synonymous with _{R 551} , R ₅₅₂ and R ₅₆₁ to R ₅₆₄ in the general formula (52), respectively.)

_{In one embodiment, R 561} to R ₅₆₄ in the general formula (52) and the general formula (53) are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms (preferably phenyl groups). ).

_{In one embodiment, R 521} and R ₅₂₂ in the general formula (5) and R ₅₅₁ _{and R 552} in the general formula (52) and the general formula (53) are hydrogen atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substitutable or unsubstituted" in the general formula (5), general formula (52) and general formula (53) is
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (5) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by the general formula (6))
The compound represented by the general formula (6) will be described.

(In the general formula (6),
Ring a, ring b and ring c are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocycle having 5 to 50 atomic atoms.
R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ independently combine with the a ring, b ring or c ring to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or do not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
_R601 and _R602 , which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, are independently
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

Rings a, b, and c are rings (substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms 6 to 50) that are condensed into the fused bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (6) composed of a boron atom and two nitrogen atoms. (Aromatic hydrocarbon ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 atoms).

The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the a ring, b ring and c ring has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "aryl group".
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the a ring contains three carbon atoms on the condensed two-ring structure in the center of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms.
The "aromatic hydrocarbon ring" of the b ring and the c ring contains two carbon atoms on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms.

Specific examples of the "substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms" include a compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "aryl group" described in the specific example group G1.
The "heterocycle" of the a ring, b ring and c ring has the same structure as the compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the above-mentioned "heterocyclic group".
The "heterocycle" of the a ring contains three carbon atoms on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms. The "heterocycle" of the b ring and the c ring contains two carbon atoms on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (6) as ring-forming atoms. Specific examples of the "heterocyclic ring having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms" include a compound in which a hydrogen atom is introduced into the "heterocyclic group" described in the specific example group G2.

R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ may be independently bonded to the a ring, b ring or c ring to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle. The heterocycle in this case contains a nitrogen atom on the condensed bicyclic structure at the center of the general formula (6). The heterocycle in this case may contain a heteroatom other than the nitrogen atom. When R ₆₀₁ and R ₆₀₂ are bonded to the a ring, b ring or c ring, specifically, the atoms constituting the a ring, b ring or c ring are bonded to the atoms constituting _{R 601} and R _602. Means. For example, R ₆₀₁ may be bonded to the a _{ring to form a nitrogen-containing heterocycle in which the ring containing R 601} and the a ring are condensed (or three-ring condensation or more). Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen and having two or more ring condensations in the specific example group G2.
The same _applies to the case where R 601 is bonded to the b ring, the case where R ₆₀₂ is bonded to the a ring, and the case where R ₆₀₂ is bonded to the c ring.

In one embodiment, the a ring, b ring, and c ring in the general formula (6) are independently substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon rings having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
In one embodiment, the a ring, b ring and c ring in the general formula (6) are independently substituted or unsubstituted benzene rings or naphthalene rings, respectively.

_{In one embodiment, R 601} and R ₆₀₂ in the general formula (6) are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
It is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (6) is a compound represented by the following general formula (62).

(In the general formula (62),
R _601A combines with one or more selected from the group consisting of R ₆₁₁ and R ₆₂₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R _602A combines with one or more selected from the group consisting of R ₆₁₃ and R ₆₁₄ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
_{R 601A} and R _602A , which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, are independently
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 611} to R ₆₂₁ , which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form the monocycle, and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

_{R 601A} and R _602A of the general formula (62) are groups corresponding to _{R 601} and R ₆₀₂ of the general formula (6), respectively.
For example, R _601A and R ₆₁₁ may be bonded to form a two-ring condensation (or three-ring condensation or more) nitrogen-containing heterocycle in which a ring containing these and a benzene ring corresponding to the a ring are condensed. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen and having two or more ring condensations in the specific example group G2. The same _applies _{to the case where R 601A} and R ₆₂₁ are combined, the case where R 602A and R ₆₁₃ are combined, and the case where R _602A and R ₆₁₄ are combined.

One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₆₁₁ to R ₆₂₁
They may combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or they may combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring.
For example, R ₆₁₁ and R ₆₁₂ may be bonded to form a structure in which a benzene ring, an indole ring, a pyrrole ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, or the like is condensed with a 6-membered ring to which they are bonded. The formed fused ring becomes a naphthalene ring, a carbazole ring, an indole ring, a dibenzofuran ring or a dibenzothiophene ring.

_{In one embodiment, R 611} to R ₆₂₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 611} to R ₆₂₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 611} to R ₆₂₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
It is a hydrogen atom or an substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 611} to R ₆₂₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
A hydrogen atom or an substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.
At _{least one of R 611} to R ₆₂₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (62) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63).

(In the general formula (63),
R ₆₃₁ combines with R ₆₄₆ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₃ combines with R ₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₄ combines with R ₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₄₁ combines with R ₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form the monocycle, and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

R ₆₃₁ may _{be combined with R 646} to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle. For example, R ₆₃₁ and R ₆₄₆ are bonded to form a nitrogen-containing heterocycle having three or more ring condensations in which a benzene ring to which R ₆₄₆ is bonded, a ring containing N, and a benzene ring corresponding to the a ring are condensed. You may. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocycle include compounds corresponding to heterocyclic groups containing nitrogen and having three or more ring condensations in the specific example group G2. The same _applies when R 633 and R ₆₄₇ are combined, when R ₆₃₄ and R ₆₅₁ are combined, and when R ₆₄₁ and R ₆₄₂ are combined.

_{In one embodiment, R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
It is a hydrogen atom or an substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

_{In one embodiment, R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not contribute to ring formation, are independent of each other.
A hydrogen atom or an substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.
At _{least one of R 631} to R ₆₅₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63A).

(In the general formula (63A),
R ₆₆₁ is
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms.
R ₆₆₂ to R ₆₆₅ are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms. )

In one embodiment, R ₆₆₁ to R ₆₆₅ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₆₁ to R ₆₆₅ are independently substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63B).

(In the general formula (63B),
R ₆₇₁ and R ₆₇₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by −N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), or an aryl group having a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50.
R ₆₇₃ to R ₆₇₅ are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by −N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), or an aryl group having a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63B').

(In the general formula (63B'), R ₆₇₂ to R ₆₇₅ are independently synonymous with _{R 672} to R ₆₇₅ in the general formula (63B).)

In one embodiment, at least one of _{R 671} to R ₆₇₅
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by −N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), or an aryl group having a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50.

In one embodiment
R ₆₇₂ is
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by −N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), or an aryl group having a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50.
R ₆₇₁ and R ₆₇₃ to R ₆₇₅ are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A group represented by −N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R ₉₀₇ ), or an aryl group having a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63C).

(In the general formula (63C),
R ₆₈₁ and R ₆₈₂ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms.
R ₆₈₃ to R ₆₈₆ are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (63) is a compound represented by the following general formula (63C').

(In the general formula (63C'), R ₆₈₃ to R ₆₈₆ are independently synonymous with _{R 683} to R ₆₈₆ in the general formula (63C).)

In one embodiment, R ₆₈₁ to R ₆₈₆ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₆₈₁ to R ₆₈₆ are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

The compound represented by the general formula (6) first forms an intermediate by binding the a ring, the b ring and the c ring with a linking group ( _{a group containing N-R 601} and a group containing N-R _602). The final product can be produced by producing (first reaction) and bonding the a ring, b ring and c ring with a linking group (group containing a boron atom) (second reaction). In the first reaction, an amination reaction such as the Buchwald-Hartwig reaction can be applied. In the second reaction, a tandem hetero Friedel-Crafts reaction or the like can be applied.

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (6) will be described below, but these are merely examples, and the compound represented by the general formula (6) is not limited to the following specific examples.

(Compound represented by the general formula (7))
The compound represented by the general formula (7) will be described.

(In the general formula (7),
The r ring is a ring represented by the general formula (72) or the general formula (73) that is condensed at an arbitrary position of an adjacent ring.
The q-ring and the s-ring are rings represented by the general formula (74) that are independently condensed at arbitrary positions of adjacent rings.
The p-ring and the t-ring are structures represented by the general formula (75) or the general formula (76), which are independently condensed at arbitrary positions of adjacent rings.
X ₇ is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an NR ₇₀₂ .
If R ₇₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 701} Adjacent
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 701} and R ₇₀₂ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ are independent of each other.
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L ₇₀₁ is
Substituent or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkylene group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
m1 is 0, 1 or 2,
m2 is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
m3 is 0, 1, 2 or 3 independently of each other.
m4 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, respectively.
If R ₇₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 701} may be identical to each other or different,
If X ₇ there are a plurality, the plurality of X ₇ may be identical to each other or different,
If R ₇₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 702} may be identical to each other or different,
If Ar ₇₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{Ar 701} may be identical to each other or different,
If Ar ₇₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{Ar 702} may be identical to each other or different,
If L ₇₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{L 701} may be identical to one another or different. )

In the general formula (7), each ring of p ring, q ring, r ring, s ring and t ring shares two carbon atoms with an adjacent ring and is condensed. The position and direction of condensation are not limited, and condensation is possible at any position and direction.

In one embodiment, m1 = 0 or m2 = 0 in the general formula (72) or the general formula (73) as the r ring.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-1) to (71-6).

(In the general formulas (71-1) to (71-6), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ _{, m1 and m3 are R 701} in the general formula (7), respectively. , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m3.)

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-11) to (71-13).

(In the general formulas (71-11) to (71-13), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1, m3 and m4 are in the general formula (7), respectively. It is synonymous with R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1, m3, and m4.)

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-21) to (71-25).

(In the general formulas (71-21) to (71-25), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ _{, m1 and m4 are R 701} in the general formula (7), respectively. , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m1 and m4.)

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (7) is represented by any of the following general formulas (71-31) to (71-33).

(In the general formulas (71-31) to (71-33), R ₇₀₁ , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ _{, and m2 to m4 are R 701} in the general formula (7), respectively. , X ₇ , Ar ₇₀₁ , Ar ₇₀₂ , L ₇₀₁ , m2 to m4.)

In one embodiment, Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, one of Ar ₇₀₁ and Ar ₇₀₂ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring-forming carbon atoms, and _{the other of Ar 701} and Ar ₇₀₂ has 5 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. ~ 50 heterocyclic groups.

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (7) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by the general formula (8))
The compound represented by the general formula (8) will be described.

(In the general formula (8),
At _{least one pair of R 801} and R ₈₀₂ , R ₈₀₂ and R ₈₀₃ , and R ₈₀₃ and R ₈₀₄ combine with each other to form a divalent group represented by the following general formula (82).
At _{least one set of R 805} and R ₈₀₆ , R ₈₀₆ and R ₈₀₇ , and R ₈₀₇ and R ₈₀₈ combine with each other to form a divalent group represented by the following general formula (83). )

_{(At least one of R 801} to R ₈₀₄ and R ₈₁₁ to R ₈₁₄ that do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (82) is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (84). ,
_{At least one of R 805} to R ₈₀₈ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ that do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (83) is a monovalent group represented by the following general formula (84).
X ₈ is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an NR ₈₀₉ .
Not form a divalent group represented by general formula (82) and the general formula (83), and, _R 801 _{~ R 808} is not a monovalent group represented by general formula (84), wherein _{R 811} to R ₈₁₄ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ , which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84), _{and R 809} are independently, respectively.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

(In the general formula (84),
Ar ₈₀₁ and Ar ₈₀₂ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
_L801 to _L803 are independent of each other.
Single bond,
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms,
A divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms and 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a divalent linking group formed by bonding 2 to 4 groups selected from the group consisting of divalent heterocyclic groups.
* In the general formula (84) indicates the ring structure represented by the general formula (8) and the bonding position with the group represented by the general formula (82) or the general formula (83). )

In the general formula (8), the positions where the divalent group represented by the general formula (82) and the divalent group represented by the general formula (83) are formed are not particularly limited, and are R ₈₀₁ to R _808. The group can be formed at possible positions.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (8) is represented by any of the following general formulas (81-1) to (81-6).

(In the general formula (81-1) to the general formula (81-6),
X ₈ is synonymous with _{X 8} in the general formula (8).
At _{least two of R801} to _R824 are monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84).
_R801 to _R824 , which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84), are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (8) is represented by any of the following general formulas (81-7) to (81-18).

(In the general formula (81-7) to the general formula (81-18),
X ₈ is synonymous with _{X 8} in the general formula (8).
* Is a single bond that binds to a monovalent group represented by the general formula (84).
R ₈₀₁ - _{R 824} each independently, in the general formula (81-1) is not a monovalent group represented by the general formula in ~ the general formula _{(81-6) (84) R 801} ~ R 824 Is synonymous with. )

_{R 801} to R ₈₀₈ , which do not form a divalent group represented by the general formula (82) and the general formula (83) and are not a monovalent group represented by the general formula (84), and _{R 811} to R ₈₁₄ and R ₈₂₁ to R ₈₂₄ , which are not monovalent groups represented by the general formula (84), are preferably independently of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

The monovalent group represented by the general formula (84) is preferably represented by the following general formula (85) or general formula (86).

(In the general formula (85),
_R831 to _R840 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
* In the general formula (85) is synonymous with * in the general formula (84). )

(In the general formula (86),
Ar _801, _{L 801} and _{L 803} are the same meaning as _Ar _{801, L 801} and _{L 803} in the general formula (84),
HAR ₈₀₁ has a structure represented by the following general formula (87). )

(In the general formula (87),
X ₈₁ is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom and
Any one of R ₈₄₁ to R ₈₄₈ is a single bond that binds to _{L 803.}
_{R 841} to R ₈₄₈ , which are not single bonds, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

As the compound represented by the general formula (8), in addition to the compound described in International Publication No. 2014/104144, for example, the compound shown below can be mentioned as a specific example.

(Compound represented by the general formula (9))
The compound represented by the general formula (9) will be described.

(In the general formula (9),
A ₉₁ ring and A ₉₂ ring are independent of each other.
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocycle having 5 to 50 atoms.
One or more rings selected from the group consisting of A ₉₁ ring and A _{92 ring}
Combine with * of the structure represented by the following general formula (92). )

(In the general formula (92),
A ₉₃ ring is
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocycle having 5 to 50 atoms.
X ₉ is NR ₉₃ , C (R ₉₄ ) (R ₉₅ ), Si (R ₉₆ ) (R ₉₇ ), Ge (R ₉₈ ) (R ₉₉ ), oxygen atom, sulfur atom or selenium atom.
R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ are
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 91} and R ₉₂ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, and _{R 93} to R ₉₉ , respectively, independently of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

One or more rings selected from the group consisting of A ₉₁ ring and A ₉₂ ring are combined with * of the structure represented by the general formula (92). That is, in one embodiment, _{the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of ring A 91} or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle is bonded to * having a structure represented by the general formula (92). Further, in one embodiment, _{the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of ring A 92} or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle is bonded to * having a structure represented by the general formula (92).

In one embodiment, a group represented by the following general formula (93) is attached to either or both _{of the A 91} ring and the A _{92 ring.}

(In the general formula (93),
Ar ₉₁ and Ar ₉₂ are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L ₉₁ to L ₉₃ are independent of each other.
Single bond,
Substituent or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms,
A divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or an arylene group having 6 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms and 5 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a divalent linking group formed by bonding 2 to 4 groups selected from the group consisting of divalent heterocyclic groups.
Formula (93) in the * _indicates the bonding position with either _{A 91} ring and _{A 92} ring. )

In one embodiment, in addition to the _{A 91} _{ring, the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring of the A 92} ring or the ring-forming atom of the heterocycle has a structure represented by the general formula (92). Combine with *. In this case, the structures represented by the general formula (92) may be the same or different from each other.

In one embodiment, R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
In one embodiment, R ₉₁ and R ₉₂ combine with each other to form a fluorene structure.

In one embodiment, ring A ₉₁ and ring A ₉₂ are independently substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon rings having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, for example, substituted or unsubstituted benzene rings. ..

In one embodiment, ring A ₉₃ is a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring.
In one embodiment, X ₉ is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (9) include the compounds shown below.

(Compound represented by the general formula (10))
The compound represented by the general formula (10) will be described.

(In the general formula (10),
Ax ₁ ring is a ring represented by the general formula to condensation at any position adjacent rings (10a),
Ax ₂ ring is a ring represented by the general formula to condensation at any position adjacent ring (10b),
Formula (10b) in the two * is bonded to any position of Ax ₃ rings,
X _A and X _B are independently C (R ₁₀₀₃ ) (R ₁₀₀₄ ), Si (R ₁₀₀₅ ) (R ₁₀₀₆ ), oxygen atom or sulfur atom, respectively.
Ax ₃ ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocycle having 5 to 50 atomic atoms.
Ar ₁₀₀₁
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
R ₁₀₀₁ to R ₁₀₀₆ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx1 is 3 and mx2 is 2.
Multiple R _1001s are the same as or different from each other,
Multiple R _1002s are the same as or different from each other,
ax is 0, 1 or 2,
When ax is 0 or 1, the structures in parentheses indicated by "3-ax" are the same or different from each other.
When ax is 2, the plurality of Ar _1001s are the same as or different from each other. )

In one embodiment, Ar ₁₀₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, Ax ₃ ring is an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or a substituted or unsubstituted ring carbon atoms 6 to 50, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or It is a substituted or unsubstituted anthracene ring.

In one embodiment, R ₁₀₀₃ and R ₁₀₀₄ are independently substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In one embodiment, ax is 1.

Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (10) include the compounds shown below.

In one embodiment, the light emitting layer is a compound of at least one of a third compound and a fourth compound.
The compound represented by the general formula (4),
The compound represented by the general formula (5),
The compound represented by the general formula (7),
The compound represented by the general formula (8),
It contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the general formula (9) and the compound represented by the following general formula (63a).

(In the general formula (63a),
R ₆₃₁ combines with R ₆₄₆ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₃ combines with R ₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₃₄ combines with R ₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
R ₆₄₁ combines with R ₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, or does not form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.
One or more pairs of two or more adjacent R ₆₃₁ to R ₆₅₁
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
_{R 631} to R ₆₅₁ , which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, do not form the monocycle, and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, at least one of _{R 631} to R ₆₅₁ that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle, does not form the monocycle, and does not form the fused ring,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is a compound represented by the general formula (41-3), the general formula (41-4) or the general formula (41-5). , The A1 ring in the general formula (41-5) is a fused aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 10 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms, or a condensed product having 8 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a heterocycle.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming condensed aromatic having 10 to 50 carbon atoms in the general formula (41-3), the general formula (41-4), and the general formula (41-5). The hydrocarbon ring
Substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene rings,
A substituted or unsubstituted anthracene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring.
The substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to 50 ring-forming atoms is
Substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming condensed aromatic hydrocarbon having 10 to 50 carbon atoms in the general formula (41-3), the general formula (41-4) or the general formula (41-5). The hydrogen ring
A substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring.
The substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to 50 ring-forming atoms is
Substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring,
A substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring or a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (4) is
Compounds represented by the following general formula (461),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (462),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (463),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (464),
Compounds represented by the following general formula (465),
It is selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by the following general formula (466) and the compound represented by the following general formula (467).

(In the general formulas (461) to (467),
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ , R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₆ , R ₄₄₀ to R _448, and R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
R ₄₃₇ , R ₄₃₈ _{, and R 421} to R ₄₂₇ , R ₄₃₁ to R ₄₃₆ , R ₄₄₀ to R _448, and R ₄₅₁ to R ₄₅₄ , which do not form the monocyclic ring and do not form the condensed ring, are independent of each other. ,
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R ₉₀₁ ) (R ₉₀₂ ) (R _903),
A group represented by -O- (R _904),
A group represented by -S- (R _905),
A group represented by -N (R ₉₀₆ ) (R _907),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
X ₄ is an oxygen atom, NR ₈₀₁ or C (R ₈₀₂ ) (R ₈₀₃ ).
_R801 , _R802 and _R803 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
If R ₈₀₁ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 801} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₂ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 802} is the same or different from each other,
If R ₈₀₃ there are a plurality, a plurality of _{R 803} may or different are identical to one another. )

In one embodiment, R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₈ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.

In one embodiment, R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₇ are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
It is selected from the group consisting of an aryl group having 6 to 18 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming carbon atoms and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (41-3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3-1).

(In the general formula (41-3-1), R ₄₂₃ , R ₄₂₅ , R ₄₂₆ , R ₄₄₂ , R ₄₄₄ and R ₄₄₅ _{are independently related to R 423} and R ₄₂₅ in the general formula (41-3), respectively. , R ₄₂₆ , R ₄₄₂ , R ₄₄₄ and R _445. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the general formula (41-3) is a compound represented by the following general formula (41-3-2).

(In the general formula _{_{(41-3-2), R 421 ~ R}} 427 and _R 440 _{~ R 448} are each independently, _R 421 in formula (41-3) _{~ R 427} and _R 440 _{~ R 448} Is synonymous with
However, at least one of _{R 421} to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₆ is a group represented by _{-N (R 906} ) (R _907). )

In one embodiment, any two of _{R 421} to R ₄₂₇ and R ₄₄₀ to R _{446 in} the above formula (41-3-2) are based on a group represented by _{-N (R 906} ) (R _907). is there.

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the above formula (41-3-2) is a compound represented by the following formula (41-3-3).

(In the general formula (41-3-3), R ₄₂₁ to R ₄₂₄ , R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₃ , R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ _{are independently each of R 421} to R ₄₂₄ in the general formula (41-3). , R ₄₄₀ to R ₄₄₃ , R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ .
R _A , R _B , _RC and R _D are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 atoms. )

In one embodiment, the compound represented by the above formula (41-3-3) is a compound represented by the following formula (41-3-4).

(In the general formula (41-3-4), R ₄₄₇ , R ₄₄₈ , R _A , R _B , _RC and R _D _{are independently each of R 447} and R in the above formula (41-3-3). _{_448,} _R a, _R B, the same meanings as _{R C} and _{R D.)}

In one _{_{_{embodiment, R A, R B, R}}} C and _{R D} are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted ring aryl group having 6 to 18.

In one _{_{_{embodiment, R A, R B, R}}} C and _{R D} are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group.

In one embodiment, R ₄₄₇ and R ₄₄₈ are hydrogen atoms.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
Unsubstituted alkyl groups with 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group with 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-Si (R _901a ) (R _902a ) (R _903a ),
-O- (R _904a ),
-S- (R _905a ),
-N (R _906a ) (R _907a ),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
An unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms or an unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
R _901a to R _907a are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Unsubstituted alkyl groups with 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
An unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms or an unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R _901a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 901a} may be identical to each other or different,
If R _902a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 902a} may be identical to each other or different,
If R _903a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 903a} may be identical to each other or different,
If R _904a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 904a} may be identical to each other or different,
If R _905a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 905a} may be identical to each other or different,
If R _906a is present 2 or more, 2 or more _{R 906a} may be identical to each other or different,
When _{two or more R 907a} are present, the two or more R _907a are the same as or different from each other.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
Unsubstituted alkyl groups with 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
It is an aryl group having an unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 50, or a heterocyclic group having an unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 5 to 50.

In one embodiment, the substituent in the case of "substituent or unsubstituted" in each of the above formulas is
Unsubstituted alkyl groups with 1 to 18 carbon atoms,
It is an aryl group having an unsubstituted ring-forming carbon number of 6 to 18 or a heterocyclic group having an unsubstituted ring-forming atom number of 5 to 18.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the second light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent fourth compound, and the fourth compound emits light having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less. It is preferably a compound.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the first light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent third compound, and the third compound exhibits light emission having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less. It is preferably a compound.

The method for measuring the main peak wavelength of the compound is as follows. ^{A toluene solution of 10-6} mol / L or more and ^10-5 mol / L or less of the compound to be measured is prepared, placed in a quartz cell, and the emission spectrum of this sample at room temperature (300K) (vertical axis: emission intensity, horizontal). Axis: Wavelength.) Is measured. The emission spectrum can be measured by a spectrophotometer (device name: F-7000) manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Corporation. The emission spectrum measuring device is not limited to the device used here.
In the emission spectrum, the peak wavelength of the emission spectrum having the maximum emission intensity is defined as the emission main peak wavelength. In the present specification, the main peak wavelength may be referred to as a fluorescence emission main peak wavelength (FL-peak).

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, when the first light emitting layer contains the first compound and the third compound, the first compound is a host material (sometimes referred to as a matrix material). Is preferable, and the third compound is preferably a dopant material (sometimes referred to as a guest material, an emitter, or a light emitting material).

In the organic EL element according to the present embodiment, when the first light emitting layer contains the first compound and the third compound, the singlet energy S ₁ (H1) of the first compound and the singlet of the third compound are used. It is preferable that the term energy S ₁ (D3) satisfies the relationship of the following mathematical formula (Equation 1).
S ₁ (H1)> S ₁ (D3) ... (Equation 1)

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, when the second light emitting layer contains the second compound and the fourth compound, the second compound is a host material (sometimes referred to as a matrix material). The fourth compound is preferably a dopant material (sometimes referred to as a guest material, an emitter, or a light emitting material).

In the organic EL device according to this embodiment, the single second when the light emitting layer contains a second compound and the fourth compound, a singlet energy S _{1 (H2)} of the second compound, the fourth compound It is preferable that the term energy S ₁ (D4) satisfies the relationship of the following mathematical formula (Equation 2).
S ₁ (H2)> S ₁ (D4) ... (Equation 2)

(Singlet energy S ₁ )
The method of measuring the solution using a singlet energy S ₁ (hereinafter sometimes referred to as solution method.), A method described below.
^{A toluene solution of 10-5} mol / L or more and ^10-4 mol / L or less of the compound to be measured is prepared, placed in a quartz cell, and the absorption spectrum of this sample at room temperature (300 K) (vertical axis: absorption intensity, horizontal). Axis: Wavelength.) Is measured. A tangent line is drawn for the falling edge of the absorption spectrum on the long wavelength side, and the wavelength value λedge [nm] at the intersection of the tangent line and the horizontal axis is substituted into the conversion formula (F2) shown below to calculate the singlet energy. To do.
Conversion formula (F2): S ₁ [eV] = 1239.85 / λedge
Examples of the absorption spectrum measuring device include, but are not limited to, a spectrophotometer (device name: U3310) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.

The tangent to the falling edge of the absorption spectrum on the long wavelength side is drawn as follows. When moving on the spectrum curve from the maximum value on the longest wavelength side to the long wavelength direction among the maximum values of the absorption spectrum, consider the tangents at each point on the curve. This tangent repeats that the slope decreases and then increases as the curve descends (ie, as the value on the vertical axis decreases). The tangent line drawn at the point where the slope value takes the minimum value on the longest wavelength side (except when the absorbance is 0.1 or less) is defined as the tangent line to the fall of the long wavelength side of the absorption spectrum.
The maximum point having an absorbance value of 0.2 or less is not included in the maximum value on the longest wavelength side.

In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, it is also preferable that the electron mobility μH1 of the first compound and the electron mobility μH2 of the second compound satisfy the relationship of the following mathematical formula (Equation 3).
μH2> μH1 ... (Equation 3)

When the first compound and the second compound satisfy the relationship of the above formula (Equation 3), the recombination ability of holes and electrons in the first light emitting layer is improved.

The electron mobility can be measured by the following method using impedance spectroscopy.
A layer to be measured having a thickness of 100 nm to 200 nm is sandwiched between an anode and a cathode, and a minute AC voltage of 100 mV or less is applied while applying a bias DC voltage. The alternating current value (absolute value and phase) flowing at this time is measured. This measurement is performed while changing the frequency of the AC voltage, and the complex impedance (Z) is calculated from the current value and the voltage value. At this time, the frequency dependence of the imaginary part (IMM) of the modulus M = iωZ (i: imaginary unit, ω: angular frequency) is obtained, and the reciprocal of the frequency ω at which IMM is the maximum value is transmitted through the measurement target layer. Defined as the response time of. Then, the electron mobility is calculated by the following formula.
Electron mobility = (film thickness of the layer to be measured) ² / (response time / voltage)

The first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer preferably do not contain a phosphorescent material (dopant material).
Further, it is preferable that the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer do not contain a heavy metal complex and a phosphorescent rare earth metal complex. Here, examples of the heavy metal complex include an iridium complex, an osmium complex, a platinum complex, and the like.
Further, it is also preferable that the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer do not contain a metal complex.

(Film thickness of light emitting layer)
The film thickness of the light emitting layer of the organic EL device according to the present embodiment is preferably 5 nm or more and 50 nm or less, more preferably 7 nm or more and 50 nm or less, and further preferably 10 nm or more and 50 nm or less. When the film thickness of the light emitting layer is 5 nm or more, the light emitting layer is easily formed and the chromaticity is easily adjusted. When the film thickness of the light emitting layer is 50 nm or less, it is easy to suppress an increase in the drive voltage.

(Compound content in the light emitting layer)
When the first light emitting layer contains the first compound and the third compound, the contents of the first compound and the third compound in the first light emitting layer shall be, for example, in the following ranges, respectively. Is preferable.
The content of the first compound is preferably 80% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, and preferably 95% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less. More preferred.
The content of the third compound is preferably 1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or more and 7% by mass or less, and preferably 1% by mass or more and 5% by mass or less. More preferred.
However, the upper limit of the total content of the first compound and the third compound in the first light emitting layer is 100% by mass.

The present embodiment does not exclude that the first light emitting layer contains a material other than the first compound and the third compound.
The first light emitting layer may contain only one kind of the first compound, or may contain two or more kinds of the first compound. The first light emitting layer may contain only one kind of the third compound, or may contain two or more kinds.

When the second light emitting layer contains the second compound and the fourth compound, the contents of the second compound and the fourth compound in the second light emitting layer shall be, for example, in the following ranges, respectively. Is preferable.
The content of the second compound is preferably 80% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less, and preferably 95% by mass or more and 99% by mass or less. More preferred.
The content of the fourth compound is preferably 1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or more and 7% by mass or less, and preferably 1% by mass or more and 5% by mass or less. More preferred.
However, the upper limit of the total content of the second compound and the fourth compound in the second light emitting layer is 100% by mass.

The present embodiment does not exclude that the second light emitting layer contains a material other than the second compound and the fourth compound.
The second light emitting layer may contain only one type of the second compound, or may contain two or more types. The second light emitting layer may contain only one kind of the fourth compound, or may contain two or more kinds.

The configuration of the organic EL element will be further described. Hereinafter, the description of the reference numeral may be omitted.

(substrate)
The substrate is used as a support for an organic EL element. As the substrate, for example, glass, quartz, plastic, or the like can be used. Moreover, you may use a flexible substrate. The flexible substrate is a bendable (flexible) substrate, and examples thereof include a plastic substrate. Examples of the material for forming the plastic substrate include polycarbonate, polyarylate, polyether sulfone, polypropylene, polyester, polyvinyl fluoride, polyvinyl chloride, polyimide, polyethylene naphthalate and the like. Inorganic vapor deposition film can also be used.

(anode)
For the anode formed on the substrate, it is preferable to use a metal having a large work function (specifically, 4.0 eV or more), an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like. Specifically, for example, indium tin oxide (ITO: Indium Tin Oxide), indium tin oxide containing silicon or silicon oxide, indium oxide-zinc oxide, tungsten oxide, and indium oxide containing zinc oxide. , Graphene and the like. In addition, gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), iron (Fe), cobalt (Co), copper (Cu), palladium ( Pd), titanium (Ti), or a nitride of a metallic material (for example, titanium nitride) and the like can be mentioned.

These materials are usually formed by a sputtering method. For example, indium oxide-zinc oxide can be formed by a sputtering method by using a target in which 1% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less of zinc oxide is added to indium oxide. Further, for example, indium oxide containing tungsten oxide and zinc oxide contained 0.5% by mass or more and 5% by mass or less of tungsten oxide and 0.1% by mass or more and 1% by mass or less of zinc oxide with respect to indium oxide. By using a target, it can be formed by a sputtering method. In addition, it may be produced by a vacuum vapor deposition method, a coating method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method or the like.

Of the EL layers formed on the anode, the hole injection layer formed in contact with the anode is formed by using a composite material that facilitates hole injection regardless of the work function of the electrode. , Possible electrode materials (eg, metals, alloys, electrically conductive compounds, and mixtures thereof, and other elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the Periodic Table of the Elements) can be used.

Elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the Periodic Table of the Elements, which are materials with a small work function, that is, alkali metals such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), and magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca), and strontium. Alkaline earth metals such as (Sr), rare earth metals such as alloys containing them (for example, MgAg, AlLi), europium (Eu), ytterbium (Yb), and alloys containing these can also be used. When forming an anode using an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or an alloy containing these, a vacuum vapor deposition method or a sputtering method can be used. Further, when silver paste or the like is used, a coating method, an inkjet method or the like can be used.

(cathode)
As the cathode, it is preferable to use a metal having a small work function (specifically, 3.8 eV or less), an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof, or the like. Specific examples of such a cathode material include elements belonging to Group 1 or Group 2 of the Periodic Table of the Elements, that is, alkali metals such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), magnesium (Mg), and calcium (Ca). ), Alkaline earth metals such as strontium (Sr), and rare earth metals such as alloys containing them (for example, MgAg, AlLi), europium (Eu), ytterbium (Yb), and alloys containing these.

When forming a cathode using an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or an alloy containing these, a vacuum vapor deposition method or a sputtering method can be used. When a silver paste or the like is used, a coating method, an inkjet method, or the like can be used.

By providing the electron injection layer, a cathode is formed using various conductive materials such as indium tin oxide containing Al, Ag, ITO, graphene, silicon or silicon oxide, regardless of the size of the work function. can do. These conductive materials can be formed into a film by using a sputtering method, an inkjet method, a spin coating method, or the like.

(Hole injection layer)
The hole injection layer is a layer containing a substance having a high hole injection property. Substances with high hole injection properties include molybdenum oxide, titanium oxide, vanadium oxide, renium oxide, ruthenium oxide, chromium oxide, zirconium oxide, hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, silver oxide, etc. Tungsten oxide, manganese oxide and the like can be used.

Further, as a substance having high hole injection property, a low molecular weight organic compound 4,4', 4''-tris (N, N-diphenylamino) triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4' , 4''-Tris [N- (3-methylphenyl) -N-phenylamino] triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4'-bis [N- (4-diphenylaminophenyl) -N-phenyl Amino] biphenyl (abbreviation: DPAB), 4,4'-bis (N- {4- [N'-(3-methylphenyl) -N'-phenylamino] phenyl} -N-phenylamino) biphenyl (abbreviation: abbreviation: DNTPD), 1,3,5-tris [N- (4-diphenylaminophenyl) -N-phenylamino] benzene (abbreviation: DPA3B), 3- [N- (9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl) -N -Phenylamino] -9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA1), 3,6-bis [N- (9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl) -N-phenylamino] -9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCA2), Aromatic amine compounds such as 3- [N- (1-naphthyl) -N- (9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl) amino] -9-phenylcarbazole (abbreviation: PCzPCN1) and dipyrazino [2,3-f : 20,30-h] Kinoxalin-2,3,6,7,10,11-hexacarbonitrile (HAT-CN) can also be mentioned.

Further, as a substance having high hole injection property, a polymer compound (oligomer, dendrimer, polymer, etc.) can also be used. For example, poly (N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK), poly (4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA), poly [N- (4- {N'- [4- (4-diphenylamino)). Phenyl] phenyl-N'-phenylamino} phenyl) methacrylamide] (abbreviation: PTPDMA), poly [N, N'-bis (4-butylphenyl) -N, N'-bis (phenyl) benzidine] (abbreviation: Polymer compounds such as Poly-TPD) can be mentioned. Further, a polymer compound to which an acid such as poly (3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) / poly (styrene sulfonic acid) (PEDOT / PSS) or polyaniline / poly (styrene sulfonic acid) (Pani / PSS) is added is used. You can also do it.

(Hole transport layer)
The hole transport layer is a layer containing a substance having a high hole transport property. An aromatic amine compound, a carbazole derivative, an anthracene derivative, or the like can be used for the hole transport layer. Specifically, 4,4'-bis [N- (1-naphthyl) -N-phenylamino] biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB) and N, N'-bis (3-methylphenyl) -N, N'- Diphenyl- [1,1'-biphenyl] -4,4'-diamine (abbreviation: TPD), 4-phenyl-4'-(9-phenylfluoren-9-yl) triphenylamine (abbreviation: BAFLP), 4 , 4'-bis [N- (9,9-dimethylfluoren-2-yl) -N-phenylamino] biphenyl (abbreviation: DFLDPBi), 4,4', 4''-tris (N, N-diphenylamino) ) Triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4', 4''-tris [N- (3-methylphenyl) -N-phenylamino] triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4'-bis [N- (Spiro-9,9'-bifluoren-2-yl) -N-phenylamino] Aromatic amine compounds such as biphenyl (abbreviation: BSBP) can be used. The substances described here are mainly ^{substances having a hole mobility of 10-6} cm ² / (V · s) or more.

The hole transport layer includes CBP, 9- [4- (N-carbazolyl)] phenyl-10-phenylanthracene (CzPA), 9-phenyl-3- [4- (10-phenyl-9-anthril) phenyl]. Carbazole derivatives such as -9H-carbazole (PCzPA) and anthracene derivatives such as t-BuDNA, DNA and DPAnth may be used. Polymer compounds such as poly (N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK) and poly (4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA) can also be used.

However, any substance other than these may be used as long as it is a substance having a higher hole transport property than electrons. The layer containing the substance having high hole transport property is not limited to a single layer, but may be a layer in which two or more layers made of the above substances are laminated.

(Electronic transport layer)
The electron transport layer is a layer containing a substance having a high electron transport property. The electron transport layer includes 1) metal complexes such as aluminum complexes, beryllium complexes and zinc complexes, 2) complex aromatic compounds such as imidazole derivatives, benzimidazole derivatives, azine derivatives, carbazole derivatives and phenanthroline derivatives, and 3) polymer compounds. Can be used. Specifically, as low-molecular-weight organic compounds, Alq, tris (4-methyl-8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbreviation: Almq ₃ ), bis (10-hydroxybenzo [h] quinolinato) beryllium (abbreviation: BeBq ₂ ), Metal complexes such as BAlq, Znq, ZnPBO, and ZnBTZ can be used. In addition to the metal complex, 2- (4-biphenylyl) -5- (4-tert-butylphenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation: PBD), 1,3-bis [5- (Phenyl-butylphenyl) -1,3,4-oxadiazole-2-yl] benzene (abbreviation: OXD-7), 3- (4-tert-butylphenyl) -4-phenyl-5- (4-) Biphenylyl) -1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: TAZ), 3- (4-tert-butylphenyl) -4- (4-ethylphenyl) -5- (4-biphenylyl) -1,2,4- Complexes such as triazole (abbreviation: p-EtTAZ), vasofenantroline (abbreviation: BPhen), vasocuproin (abbreviation: BCP), 4,4'-bis (5-methylbenzoxadiazole-2-yl) stillben (abbreviation: BzOs) Aromatic compounds can also be used. In this embodiment, a benzimidazole compound can be preferably used. The substances described here are mainly ^{substances having electron mobility of 10-6} cm ² / (V · s) or more. A substance other than the above may be used as the electron transport layer as long as it is a substance having higher electron transport property than hole transport property. Further, the electron transport layer may be composed of a single layer, or may be composed of two or more layers made of the above substances laminated.

Further, a polymer compound can be used for the electron transport layer. For example, poly [(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl) -co- (pyridine-3,5-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-Py), poly [(9,9-dioctylfluorene-2) , 7-diyl) -co- (2,2'-bipyridine-6,6'-diyl)] (abbreviation: PF-BPy) and the like can be used.

(Electron injection layer)
The electron injection layer is a layer containing a substance having a high electron injection property. The electron injection layer includes lithium (Li), cesium (Cs), calcium (Ca), lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calcium fluoride (CaF ₂ ), lithium oxide (LiOx), etc. Alkali metals such as, alkaline earth metals, or compounds thereof can be used. In addition, a substance having electron transportability containing an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, or a compound thereof, specifically, a substance containing magnesium (Mg) in Alq or the like may be used. In this case, electron injection from the cathode can be performed more efficiently.

Alternatively, a composite material obtained by mixing an organic compound and an electron donor (donor) may be used for the electron injection layer. Such a composite material is excellent in electron injection property and electron transport property because electrons are generated in the organic compound by the electron donor. In this case, the organic compound is preferably a material excellent in transporting generated electrons, and specifically, for example, a substance (metal complex, complex aromatic compound, etc.) constituting the above-mentioned electron transport layer is used. be able to. The electron donor may be any substance that exhibits electron donating property to the organic compound. Specifically, alkali metals, alkaline earth metals and rare earth metals are preferable, and lithium, cesium, magnesium, calcium, erbium, ytterbium and the like can be mentioned. Further, alkali metal oxides and alkaline earth metal oxides are preferable, and lithium oxides, calcium oxides, barium oxides and the like can be mentioned. A Lewis base such as magnesium oxide can also be used. Further, an organic compound such as tetrathiafulvalene (abbreviation: TTF) can also be used.

(Layer formation method)
The method for forming each layer of the organic EL device of the present embodiment is not limited except as specifically mentioned above, but is limited to dry film deposition methods such as vacuum deposition method, sputtering method, plasma method, ion plating method, and spin coating. Known methods such as a coating method, a dipping method, a flow coating method, and a wet film forming method such as an inkjet method can be adopted.

(Film thickness)
The film thickness of each organic layer of the organic EL device of the present embodiment is not limited unless otherwise specified above. Generally, if the film thickness is too thin, defects such as pinholes are likely to occur, and if the film thickness is too thick, a high applied voltage is required and efficiency is deteriorated. Therefore, the film thickness of each organic layer of an organic EL element is usually several. The range from nm to 1 μm is preferable.

According to this embodiment, it is possible to provide an organic electroluminescence element having improved luminous efficiency.
In the organic EL device according to the present embodiment, the first light emitting layer containing the first compound represented by the general formula (1) or the like as the first host material and the general formula (2) or the like are used. The second light emitting layer containing the second compound represented as the second host material is in direct contact with the second light emitting layer. By stacking the first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer in this way, the generated singlet excitons and triplet excitons can be effectively utilized, and as a result, the light emitting efficiency of the organic EL element is improved. be able to.

[Second Embodiment]
(Electronics)
The electronic device according to this embodiment is equipped with an organic EL element according to any one of the above-described embodiments. Examples of the electronic device include a display device and a light emitting device. Examples of the display device include display parts (for example, an organic EL panel module, etc.), a television, a mobile phone, a tablet, a personal computer, and the like. Examples of the light emitting device include lighting and vehicle lamps.

[Modification of Embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and changes, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.

For example, the light emitting layer is not limited to two layers, and a plurality of light emitting layers exceeding two may be laminated. When the organic EL element has a plurality of light emitting layers exceeding 2, it is sufficient that at least two light emitting layers satisfy the conditions described in the above embodiment. For example, the other light emitting layer may be a fluorescence light emitting layer or a phosphorescent light emitting layer utilizing light emission by electron transition from the triplet excited state to the direct ground state.
Further, when the organic EL element has a plurality of light emitting layers, these light emitting layers may be provided adjacent to each other, or a so-called tandem type organic in which a plurality of light emitting units are laminated via an intermediate layer. It may be an EL element.

Further, for example, a barrier layer may be provided adjacent to at least one of the anode side and the cathode side of the light emitting layer. The barrier layer is preferably located in contact with the light emitting layer to block at least one of holes, electrons, and exciters.
For example, when a barrier layer is arranged in contact with the cathode side of the light emitting layer, the barrier layer transports electrons and holes reach a layer on the cathode side of the barrier layer (for example, an electron transport layer). Prevent doing. When the organic EL element includes an electron transport layer, it is preferable to include the barrier layer between the light emitting layer and the electron transport layer.
When the barrier layer is arranged in contact with the anode side of the light emitting layer, the barrier layer transports holes and electrons are transferred to the layer on the anode side of the barrier layer (for example, the hole transport layer). Prevent it from reaching. When the organic EL element includes a hole transport layer, it is preferable to include the barrier layer between the light emitting layer and the hole transport layer.
Further, a barrier layer may be provided adjacent to the light emitting layer so that the excitation energy does not leak from the light emitting layer to the peripheral layer thereof. It prevents excitons generated in the light emitting layer from moving to a layer on the electrode side of the barrier layer (for example, an electron transport layer and a hole transport layer).
It is preferable that the light emitting layer and the barrier layer are joined.

In addition, the specific structure, shape, etc. in the practice of the present invention may be other structures, etc. as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.

Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to examples. The present invention is not limited to these examples.

<Compound>
The structure of the compound represented by the general formula (1) used in the production of the organic EL device according to Reference Examples 1 to 144 is shown below.

The structure of the compound represented by the general formula (101) used in the production of the organic EL device according to Examples 1 and 2 is shown below.

The structures of the compounds represented by the general formula (2) used in the production of the organic EL devices according to Reference Examples 1 to 144 and Examples 1 and 2 are shown below.

The structures of the compounds used in the production of the organic EL elements of Comparative Example 1A and Comparative Example 2A are shown below.

The structures of other compounds used in the production of the organic EL device according to Examples 1 and 2, Reference Examples 1 to 144, Comparative Example 1A, Comparative Example 2A, Comparative Reference Examples 1 to 117 and Comparative Reference Examples 1A to 2A are shown. It is shown below.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 1>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 1]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT2 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A first light emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 15 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 1 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT2 (10) / BH1: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET1 (10) / ET2 (15) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage displayed number (98%: 2%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1 or Compound BH2) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer. Shown. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Comparative Reference Example 1]
As shown in Table 1, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 1 forms a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and forms a first light emitting layer without forming a second light emitting layer. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the first electron transport layer was formed on the top.

[Comparative Reference Example 2]
As shown in Table 1, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 2 has a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that

<Evaluation of organic EL elements>
The organic EL devices produced in Reference Examples 1 to 144, Examples 1 and 2, Comparative Examples 1A to 2A, Comparative Reference Examples 1 to 117, and Comparative Reference Examples 1A to 2A were evaluated as follows. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 1 to 46.
In this specification, the evaluation results of a certain example may be described in a plurality of tables, and the evaluation results of a certain reference example may be described in a plurality of tables. The evaluation results may be listed in multiple tables, and the evaluation results of a comparative example may be listed in multiple tables.

・ External quantum efficiency EQE
The spectral radiance spectrum when a voltage was applied to the element so that the current density was 10 mA / cm ² was measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta Co., Ltd.). From the obtained spectral radiance spectrum, the external quantum efficiency EQE (unit:%) was calculated on the assumption that Lambasian radiation was performed.

・ Life LT90
A voltage was applied to the obtained organic EL element so that the current density was 50 mA / cm ^2, and the time until the brightness became 90% with respect to the initial brightness (LT90 (unit: time)) was measured. The results are shown in Table 1.

・ Lifetime LT95
A voltage was applied to the obtained organic EL element so that the current density was 50 mA / cm ^2, and the time (LT95 (unit: time)) until the brightness became 95% with respect to the initial brightness was measured.

・ Main peak wavelength λp when driving the element
The spectral radiance spectrum when a voltage was applied to the element so that the current density of the organic EL element was 10 mA / cm ² was measured with a spectral radiance meter CS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta Co., Ltd.). From the obtained spectral radiance spectrum, the main peak wavelength λ _p (unit: nm) was calculated.

-Drive voltage The voltage (unit: V) when energized between the anode and the cathode was measured so that the current density was 10 mA / cm ^2.

As shown in Table 1, the first light emitting layer containing the first compound as the first host material and the second light emitting layer containing the second compound as the second host material were in direct contact with each other. According to the organic EL element according to Reference Example 1 having a layer structure, light was emitted with higher luminous efficiency than the organic EL element according to Comparative Reference Examples 1 and 2 having only one of the light emitting layers. Further, the organic EL element according to Reference Example 1 had a longer life than the organic EL element according to Comparative Reference Examples 1 and 2.

[Reference Examples 2 to 20]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 2 to 20 were produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 2. did.

[Comparative Reference Examples 3 to 21]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 3 to 21 are the same as those of Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 3. Made.

[Reference Example 21]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 21 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 4.

[Reference Examples 22 to 23]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 22 to 23 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 4. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 22]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 22 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 4.

[Reference Example 24]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 24 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 5.

[Reference Examples 25 to 26]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 25 to 26 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 5. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 23]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 23 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 5.

[Reference Example 27]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 27 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 6.

[Reference Examples 28 to 29]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 28 to 29 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 6. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 24]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 24 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 6.

[Reference Example 30]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 30 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 7.

[Reference Examples 31 to 32]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 31 to 32 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 7. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 25]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 25 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 7.

[Reference Example 33]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 33 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 8.

[Reference Examples 34 to 35]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 34 to 35 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 8. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 26]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 26 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 8.

[Reference Example 36]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 36 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 9.

[Reference Examples 37 to 38]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 37 to 38 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 9. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 27]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 27 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 9.

[Reference Example 39]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 39 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 10.

[Comparative Example 1A and Comparative Example 2A]
Table 10 shows the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer in the organic EL elements of Comparative Example 1A and Comparative Example 2A. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed to a compound.

[Comparative Reference Example 28]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 28 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 10.

[Reference Example 42]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 42 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 11.

[Reference Examples 43 to 44]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 43 to 44 include the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer as the compounds shown in Table 11. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed.

[Comparative Reference Example 29]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 29 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 11.

[Reference Example 45]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 45 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer and the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer were changed to the compounds shown in Table 12.

[Reference Examples 46 to 47]
In the organic EL devices of Reference Examples 46 to 47, the compounds BH1 (first host material) and compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer and the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer were changed to the compounds shown in Table 12. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1.

[Comparative Reference Example 30]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 30 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 12.

[Comparative Reference Example 31]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 31 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 12.

[Reference Example 48]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 48 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer and the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer were changed to the compounds shown in Table 13.

[Reference Examples 49 to 50]
In the organic EL devices of Reference Examples 49 to 50, the compounds BH1 (first host material) and compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer and the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer were changed to the compounds shown in Table 13. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1.

[Comparative Reference Example 32]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 32 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 13.

[Comparative Reference Example 33]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 33 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 2 except that the compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 13.

[Reference Examples 51 to 69]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 51 to 69 were produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 14.

[Comparative Reference Examples 34 to 51]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 34 to 51 were produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 15. ..

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 2>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 70]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-21 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET4 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 15 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 70 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT3 (80) / HT4 (10) / BH1-21: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET4 ( 10) / ET2 (15) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage displayed number (98%: 2%) is the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-21 or Compound BH2) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer. ) Is shown. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Examples 71 to 78]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 71 to 78 are the same as those of Reference Example 70, except that the compound BH1-21 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 16. Made.

[Comparative Reference Examples 52 to 59]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 52 to 59 form a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and the first light emitting layer is placed on the first light emitting layer without forming the second light emitting layer. Similar to Reference Example 70, except that the electron transport layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 16. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 60]
As shown in Table 16, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 60 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 70.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 3>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 79]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-29 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET3 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 15 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 79 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT3 (80) / HT4 (10) / BH1-29: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET3 ( 10) / ET2 (15) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage displayed number (98%: 2%) is the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-29 or Compound BH2) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer. ) Is shown. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Examples 80 to 90]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 80 to 90 are the same as those of Reference Example 79, except that the compound BH1-29 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 17. Made.

[Comparative Reference Examples 61 to 71]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 61 to 71 form a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and the first light emitting layer is placed on the first light emitting layer without forming the second light emitting layer. Similar to Reference Example 79, except that the electron transport layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 17. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 72]
As shown in Table 17, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 72 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 79.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 4>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 91]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and the compound HT5 and the compound HA2 are co-deposited by first covering the transparent electrode on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed. Then, a hole injection layer (HI) having a thickness of 10 nm was formed. The proportion of compound HT5 in the hole injection layer was 97% by mass, and the proportion of compound HA2 was 3% by mass.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT5 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 85 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH1-61 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET3 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound ET6 and compound Liq were co-deposited on the first electron transport layer (HBL) to form an electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 25 nm. The proportion of the compound ET6 in the electron transport layer (ET) was 50% by mass, and the proportion of the compound Liq was 50% by mass. Liq is an abbreviation for (8-quinolinolato) lithium.
Liq was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 91 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HT5: HA2 (10,97%: 3%) / HT5 (85) / HT4 (5) / BH1-61: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98) %: 2%) / ET3 (5) / ET6: Liq (25,50%: 50%) / Liq (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage-displayed number (97%: 3%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of compound HT5 and compound HA2 in the hole injection layer, and the percentage-displayed number (98%: 2%). Indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-61 or BH2) and the dopant material (Compound BD1) in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer, and is expressed as a percentage (50%: 50). %) Indicates the ratio (% by mass) of the compound ET6 and the compound Liq in the electron transport layer (ET). Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Examples 92 to 95]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 92 to 95 are the same as those of Reference Example 91, except that the compound BH1-61 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 18. Made.

[Comparative Reference Examples 73-76]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 73 to 76 form a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and the first light emitting layer is placed on the first light emitting layer without forming the second light emitting layer. Similar to Reference Example 91, except that the electron transport layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 18. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 77]
As shown in Table 18, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 77 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 91.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 5>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 96]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and the compound HT3 and the compound HA2 are co-deposited by first covering the transparent electrode on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed. Then, a hole injection layer (HI) having a thickness of 10 nm was formed. The proportion of compound HT3 in the hole injection layer was 97% by mass, and the proportion of compound HA2 was 3% by mass.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 85 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH1-75 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET3 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound ET8 and compound Liq were co-deposited on the first electron transport layer (HBL) to form an electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 25 nm. The proportion of the compound ET5 in the electron transport layer (ET) was 50% by mass, and the proportion of the compound Liq was 50% by mass. Liq is an abbreviation for (8-quinolinolato) lithium.
Liq was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 96 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HT3: HA2 (10,97%: 3%) / HT3 (85) / HT4 (5) / BH1-75: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98) %: 2%) / ET3 (5) / ET8: Liq (25,50%: 50%) / Liq (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage-displayed number (97%: 3%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of compound HT3 and compound HA2 in the hole injection layer, and the percentage-displayed number (98%: 2%). Indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-75 or BH2) and the dopant material (Compound BD1) in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer, and is expressed as a percentage (50%: 50). %) Indicates the ratio (% by mass) of the compound ET8 and the compound Liq in the electron transport layer (ET). Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 97]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 97 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 96, except that compound BH1-75 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 19. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 78]
The organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 78 forms a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and transports a first electron onto the first light emitting layer without forming a second light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 96, except that the layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 19. ..

[Comparative Reference Example 79]
As shown in Table 19, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 79 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Except for this, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 96.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 6>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 98]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and the compound HT5 and the compound HA2 are co-deposited by first covering the transparent electrode on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed. Then, a hole injection layer (HI) having a thickness of 10 nm was formed. The proportion of compound HT5 in the hole injection layer was 97% by mass, and the proportion of compound HA2 was 3% by mass.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT5 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 85 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH1-64 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET3 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound ET8 and compound Liq were co-deposited on the first electron transport layer (HBL) to form an electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 25 nm. The proportion of the compound ET8 in the electron transport layer (ET) was 50% by mass, and the proportion of the compound Liq was 50% by mass.
Liq was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 98 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HT5: HA2 (10,97%: 3%) / HT5 (85) / HT4 (5) / BH1-64: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98) %: 2%) / ET3 (5) / ET8: Liq (25,50%: 50%) / Liq (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage-displayed number (97%: 3%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of compound HT5 and compound HA2 in the hole injection layer, and the percentage-displayed number (98%: 2%). Indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-64 or BH2) and the dopant material (Compound BD1) in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer, and is expressed as a percentage (50%: 50). %) Indicates the ratio (% by mass) of the compound ET8 and the compound Liq in the electron transport layer (ET). Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Examples 99 to 103]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 99 to 103 are the same as those of Reference Example 98, except that the compound BH1-64 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 20. Made.

[Comparative Reference Examples 80 to 84]
The organic EL elements of Comparative Reference Examples 80 to 84 form a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and the first light emitting layer is placed on the first light emitting layer without forming the second light emitting layer. Similar to Reference Example 98, except that the electron transport layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 20. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 85]
As shown in Table 20, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 85 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 98.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 7>
An organic EL device was prepared and evaluated as follows.

[Reference Example 104]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and the compound HT5 and the compound HA2 are co-deposited by first covering the transparent electrode on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed. Then, a hole injection layer (HI) having a thickness of 10 nm was formed. The proportion of compound HT5 in the hole injection layer was 97% by mass, and the proportion of compound HA2 was 3% by mass.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT5 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 85 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound BH1-70 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 5 nm.
Compound ET6 and compound Liq were co-deposited on the first electron transport layer (HBL) to form an electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 25 nm. The proportion of the compound ET6 in the electron transport layer (ET) was 50% by mass, and the proportion of the compound Liq was 50% by mass.
Liq was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 104 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HT5: HA2 (10,97%: 3%) / HT5 (85) / HT4 (5) / BH1-70: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98) %: 2%) / ET1 (5) / ET6: Liq (25,50%: 50%) / Liq (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage-displayed number (97%: 3%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of compound HT5 and compound HA2 in the hole injection layer, and the percentage-displayed number (98%: 2%). Indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-70 or BH2) and the dopant material (Compound BD1) in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer, and is expressed as a percentage (50%: 50). %) Indicates the ratio (% by mass) of the compound ET6 and the compound Liq in the electron transport layer (ET). Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Examples 105 to 109]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 105 to 109 are the same as those of Reference Example 104, except that the compound BH1-70 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer is changed to the first compound shown in Table 21. Made.

[Comparative Reference Examples 86-90]
The organic EL devices of Comparative Reference Examples 86 to 90 form a first light emitting layer having a thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and the first light emitting layer is placed on the first light emitting layer without forming the second light emitting layer. Similar to Reference Example 104, except that the electron transport layer was formed and the first compound (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 21. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 91]
As shown in Table 21, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 91 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 104.

[Reference Example 110]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT8 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-81 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 15 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 110 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT8 (10) / BH1-81: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET1 ( 10) / ET2 (15) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage displayed number (98%: 2%) is the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-81 or Compound BH2) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer. ) Is shown. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 111]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 111 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 110, except that compound BH1-81 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 22. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 92]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 92 forms a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and transports a first electron onto the first light emitting layer without forming a second light emitting layer. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 110 except that a layer was formed.

[Comparative Reference Example 93]
As shown in Table 22, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 93 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Other than that, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 110.

[Reference Examples 112 to 113]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 112 to 113 were produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 23.

[Comparative Reference Example 94]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 94 was produced in the same manner as in Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the compound shown in Table 23.

[Reference Example 114]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT2 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-83 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and the film thickness is 20 nm. The second light emitting layer of the above was formed.
Compound ET7 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 15 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 114 is as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT2 (10) / BH1-83: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET7 ( 10) / ET2 (15) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Similarly, in parentheses, the percentage displayed number (98%: 2%) is the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1-83 or Compound BH2) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer or the second light emitting layer. ) Is shown. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 115]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 115 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 114, except that compound BH1-83 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 24. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 95]
The organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 95 forms a first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm as a light emitting layer, and transports a first electron onto the first light emitting layer without forming a second light emitting layer. It was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 114 except that a layer was formed.

[Comparative Reference Example 96]
As shown in Table 24, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 96 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. Except for this, it was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 114.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 11>
[Reference Example 116]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A first light emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-8 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 116 is as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT4 (10) / BH1: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-8: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET1 ( 10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1) and compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer, or the percentageed number (% by weight). 98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-8) and Compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 117]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 117 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 116, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 25. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 97]
As shown in Table 25, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 97 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 116, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 25.

[Reference Examples 118 to 119]
The organic EL devices of Reference Examples 118 to 119 are the same as those of Reference Examples 116, except that the compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer is changed to the second compound shown in Table 26. Made.

[Comparative Reference Example 98]
As shown in Table 26, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 98 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 116, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 26.

[Reference Example 120]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 120 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 116, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 27. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 99]
As shown in Table 27, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 99 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 116, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 27.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 13>
[Reference Example 121]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT4 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD2 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD2 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A first light emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD2 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD2 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET7 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 121 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT3 (80) / HT4 (10) / BH1: BD2 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-2: BD2 (20,98%: 2%) / ET7 ( 10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1) and Compound BD2 in the first light emitting layer, or the percentageed number (% by weight). 98%: 2%) indicates the ratio (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-2) and the compound BD2 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 122]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 122 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 121, except that compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 28. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 100]
As shown in Table 28, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 100 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 121, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 28.

<Manufacturing of Organic EL Element 14> [Reference Example 123]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT5 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT6 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-10 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD2 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD2 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD2 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD2 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET7 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 123 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT5 (80) / HT6 (10) / BH1-10: BD2 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-2: BD2 (20,98%: 2%) / ET7 (10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the percentage (% by mass) of the host material (Compound BH1-10) and Compound BD2 in the first light emitting layer, or is shown as a percentage. The number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-2) and Compound BD2 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 124]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 124 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 123, except that compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 29. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 101]
As shown in Table 29, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 101 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 123, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 29.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 15>
[Reference Example 125]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT7 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-10 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-2 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET7 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 125 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT3 (80) / HT7 (10) / BH1-10: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-2: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET7 (10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the percentage (% by mass) of the host material (Compound BH1-10) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer, or is shown as a percentage. The number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-2) and Compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 126]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 126 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 30. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 102]
As shown in Table 30, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 102 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 30.

[Reference Example 127]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 127 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 31. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 103]
As shown in Table 31, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 103 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 31.

[Reference Example 128]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 128 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 32. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 104]
As shown in Table 32, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 104 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 32.

[Reference Example 129]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 129 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the compound BH2-2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 33. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 105]
As shown in Table 33, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 105 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 125, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 33.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 16>
[Reference Example 130]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT3 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT7 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1-10 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass. , A first light emitting layer having a film thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-8 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET1 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET5 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 130 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT3 (80) / HT7 (10) / BH1-10: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-8: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET1 (10) / ET5 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the percentage (% by mass) of the host material (Compound BH1-10) and Compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer, or is shown as a percentage. The number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-8) and Compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 131]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 131 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 34. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 106]
As shown in Table 34, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 106 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 34.

[Reference Example 132]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 132 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 35. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 107]
As shown in Table 35, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 107 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 35.

[Reference Example 133]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 133 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 36. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 108]
As shown in Table 36, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 108 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 130, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 36.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 17>
[Reference Example 134]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT2 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A first light emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-8 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET4 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 134 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT2 (10) / BH1: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-8: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET4 ( 10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1) and compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer, or the percentageed number (% by weight). 98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-8) and Compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 135]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 135 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 37. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 109]
As shown in Table 37, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 109 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 37.

[Reference Example 136]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 136 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 38. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 110]
As shown in Table 38, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 110 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 38.

[Reference Example 137]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 137 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 39. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 111]
As shown in Table 39, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 111 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 39.

[Reference Example 138]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 138 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 40. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 112]
As shown in Table 40, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 112 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 40.

[Reference Example 139]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 139 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 41. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 113]
As shown in Table 41, the organic EL element of Comparative Reference Example 113 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 41.

[Reference Example 140]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 140 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 42. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 114]
As shown in Table 42, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 114 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 42.

[Reference Example 141]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 141 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 43. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 115]
As shown in Table 43, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 115 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 43.

[Reference Example 142]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 142 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 44. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 116]
As shown in Table 44, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 116 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 134, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 44.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 18>
[Reference Example 143]
A glass substrate (manufactured by Geomatec Co., Ltd.) with an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparent electrode (anode) having a thickness of 25 mm × 75 mm × 1.1 mm is ultrasonically cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for 5 minutes, and then UV ozone cleaning is performed for 30 minutes. I did. The film thickness of the ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.
The glass substrate with the transparent electrode line after cleaning is mounted on the substrate holder of the vacuum vapor deposition apparatus, and first, the compound HA1 is vapor-deposited on the surface on the side where the transparent electrode line is formed so as to cover the transparent electrode, and the film thickness is 5 nm. Hole injection layer (HI) was formed.
Following the film formation of the hole injection layer, the compound HT1 was deposited to form a first hole transport layer (HT) having a film thickness of 80 nm.
Following the film formation of the first hole transport layer, the compound HT2 was deposited to form a second hole transport layer (also referred to as an electron barrier layer) (EBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound BH1 (first host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the second hole transport layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A first light emitting layer having a thickness of 5 nm was formed.
Compound BH2-8 (second host material (BH)) and compound BD1 (dopant material (BD)) are co-deposited on the first light emitting layer so that the proportion of compound BD1 is 2% by mass, and a film is formed. A second light emitting layer having a thickness of 20 nm was formed.
Compound ET7 was deposited on the second light emitting layer to form a first electron transport layer (also referred to as a hole barrier layer) (HBL) having a film thickness of 10 nm.
Compound ET2 was deposited on the first electron transport layer to form a second electron transport layer (ET) having a film thickness of 20 nm.
LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transport layer to form an electron injection layer having a film thickness of 1 nm.
Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injection layer to form a cathode having a film thickness of 80 nm.
The element configuration of Reference Example 143 is shown as follows.
ITO (130) / HA1 (5) / HT1 (80) / HT2 (10) / BH1: BD1 (5,98%: 2%) / BH2-8: BD1 (20,98%: 2%) / ET7 ( 10) / ET2 (20) / LiF (1) / Al (80)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the film thickness (unit: nm).
Also in parentheses, the percentageed number (98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH1) and compound BD1 in the first light emitting layer, or the percentageed number (% by weight). 98%: 2%) indicates the proportion (mass%) of the host material (Compound BH2-8) and Compound BD1 in the second light emitting layer. Hereinafter, the same notation will be used.

[Reference Example 144]
The organic EL device of Reference Example 144 was produced in the same manner as in Reference Example 143, except that compound BH2-8 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 45. did.

[Comparative Reference Example 117]
As shown in Table 45, the organic EL device of Comparative Reference Example 117 formed a second light emitting layer having a film thickness of 25 nm on the second hole transport layer without forming the first light emitting layer. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 143, except that the second compound (second host material) in the second light emitting layer was changed to the second compound shown in Table 45.

<Manufacturing of organic EL element 19>
[Example 1 and Example 2]
In the organic EL devices of Examples 1 and 2, the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer and the compound BH2 (second host material) in the second light emitting layer are shown in Table 46. It was prepared in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that it was changed to a compound.

[Comparative Example 1A and Comparative Example 2A]
Comparative Example 1A and Comparative Example 2A are the same as in Table 10 and are reprinted in Table 46 for comparison.

[Comparative Reference Example 1A and Comparative Reference Example 2A]
In the organic EL elements of Comparative Reference Example 1A and Comparative Reference Example 2A, Comparative Reference Example 1 except that the compound BH1 (first host material) in the first light emitting layer was changed to the first compound shown in Table 46. It was produced in the same manner as above.

<Evaluation of compounds>
(Preparation of toluene solution)
Compound BD1 ^{was dissolved in toluene at a concentration of 4.9 × 10-6} mol / L to prepare a toluene solution of compound BD1. Similarly, a toluene solution of compound BD2 and a toluene solution of compound BD3 were prepared.

(Measurement of fluorescence emission main peak wavelength (FL-peak))
Using a fluorescence spectrum measuring device (spectral fluorometer F-7000 (manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Science Co., Ltd.)), the fluorescence emission main peak wavelength when a toluene solution of compound BD1 was excited at 390 nm was measured. The fluorescence emission main peak wavelengths of the toluene solution of the compound BD2 and the toluene solution of the compound BD3 were also measured in the same manner as in the compound BD1.
The fluorescence emission main peak wavelength of compound BD1 was 453 nm.
The fluorescence emission main peak wavelength of compound BD2 was 455 nm.
The fluorescence emission main peak wavelength of compound BD3 was 451 nm.

1 ... Organic EL element, 2 ... Substrate, 3 ... Anode, 4 ... Cathode, 51 ... First light emitting layer, 52 ... Second light emitting layer, 6 ... Hole injection layer, 7 ... Hole transport layer, 8 ... Electron transport layer, 9 ... Electron injection layer.

Claims

With the anode
With the cathode
A first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode,
It has a second light emitting layer arranged between the first light emitting layer and the cathode.
The first light emitting layer contains the first compound represented by the following general formula (101) as the first host material.
The second light emitting layer contains a second compound represented by the following general formula (2) as a second host material.
The first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other.
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formula (101),
R 101 to R 120 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
A group represented by -O- (R 904),
A group represented by -S- (R 905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R 801 group,
-A group represented by COOR 802,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R 101 to R 110 indicates the connection position with L 101, and one of R 111 to R 120 indicates the connection position with L 101.
L 101 is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L 101 is present 2 or more, 2 or more L 101 may be identical to each other or different,
Of one or a plurality of L 101s , at least one L 101 is a group represented by the following general formula (130) or the following general formula (140). )

(In the general formula (130) and the general formula (140),
One or more of the two or more adjacent pairs of R 1301 to R 1316
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
R 1301 , R 1303 or R 1304
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 101 to R 110.
The substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and R 1305 to R 1316 that do not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the pair consisting of two or more adjacent R 1305 to R 1316 are the substituted or unsubstituted. One of the bonds in the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms constituting the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring when the monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is formed. hand,
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1401 to R 1418
Combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle,
Bond to each other to form substituted or unsubstituted fused rings, or not to each other
R 1401 , R 1403 or R 1404
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 101 to R 110.
R 1405 to R 1418 that do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the pair consisting of two or more adjacent R 1405 to R 1418 are the substituted or unsubstituted. One of the bonds in the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms constituting the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring when the monocyclic ring or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is formed. hand,
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
R 1301 to R 1316 and R 1301 to R 1316 which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring and are not the bonding positions with L 101 , R 101 to R 110 and R 111 to R 120. R 1401 to R 1418 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903 ), -O- ( A group represented by R 904 ), a group represented by -S- (R 905 ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R 801 . -A group represented by COOR 802 , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )

(In the general formula (2),
R 201 to R 208 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
A group represented by -O- (R 904),
A group represented by -S- (R 905),
A group represented by -N (R 906 ) (R 907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R 801 group,
-A group represented by COOR 802,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L 201 and L 202 are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar 201 and Ar 202 are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )
(Of the first compound represented by the general formula (1) and the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R 901 , R 902 , R 903 , R 904 , R 905 , R 906 , R 907 , R 801 and R 802 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R 901 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 901 is the same or different from each other,
If R 902 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 902 is the same or different from each other,
If R 903 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 903 is the same or different from each other,
If R 904 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 904 is the same or different from each other,
If R 905 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 905 is the same or different from each other,
If R 906 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 906 is the same or different from each other,
If R 907 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 907 is the same or different from each other,
If R 801 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 801 is the same or different from each other,
If R 802 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 802 may or different are identical to one another. )
In the organic electroluminescence device according to claim 1,
Any one of R 1305 to R 1308 that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is
The connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
Organic electroluminescence element.
In the organic electroluminescence device according to claim 1 or 2.
Of one or more L 101s , at least one L 101 is selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (131A)-(131D), (132A)-(132D) and (133A)-(133D). Is the basis of
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formulas (131A) to (131D), (133A) to (133D) and (134A) to (134D),
One of the two * in each formula
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 101 to R 110.
The other of the two * in each equation is
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
One or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1301 to R 1316 that are not at the bonding position are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or a substituted or unsubstituted condensation. Forming rings or not binding to each other
The substituted or unsubstituted monocycle and R 1301 to R 1316 which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are independently.
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903 ), -O- ( A group represented by R 904 ), a group represented by -S- (R 905 ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R 801 . -A group represented by COOR 802 , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )
In the organic electroluminescence device according to claim 1,
One or more of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1305 to R 1308 are bonded to each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and the substituted or non-substituted ring is formed. One of the group consisting of the bonds of carbon atoms constituting the substituted monocycle or the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring is the other L 101 or R 111 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5. it is one of the bonding position of the ~ R 120,
Organic electroluminescence element.
In the organic electroluminescence device according to claim 1 or 4.
Of the one or more L 101s , at least one L 101 is a group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (135A) to (135C).
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formulas (135A) to (135C),
One or more pairs of two or more adjacent pairs of R 1301 to R 1304 and R 1309 to R 1316 combine with each other to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or substituted or unsubstituted. Forming fused rings or not binding to each other
R 1301 , R 1303 or R 1304
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 101 to R 110.
One of R 1305 to R 1308 and R 1317 to R 1320
It is the connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
R 1301 that does not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, does not form the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, and is not a bonding position with L 101 , R 101 to R 110, and R 111 to R 120. ~ R 1320 are independent of each other
Hydrogen atom, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted Alkinyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, group represented by -Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903 ), -O- ( A group represented by R 904 ), a group represented by -S- (R 905 ), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, and a group represented by -C (= O) R 801 . -A group represented by COOR 802 , a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group having 6 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms, or a heterocycle having 5 to 50 substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming atoms. It is a group. )
In the organic electroluminescence device according to claim 5.
One of R 1317 to R 1320
The connection position with another L 101 when mx is 2, 3, 4 or 5, or the connection position with one of R 111 to R 120.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
The first compound is represented by the following general formula (1010).
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formula (1010), R 101 , R 102 , R 104 to R 119 , L 101, and mx are synonymous with the definitions in the general formula (101), respectively.)
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
mx is 1, 2, or 3,
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
mx is 1,
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
R 1301 to R 1316 and R 1301 to R 1316 which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring and are not the bonding positions with L 101 , R 101 to R 110 and R 111 to R 120. R 1401 to R 1418 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
R 1301 to R 1316 and R 1301 to R 1316 which do not form the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring and the substituted or unsubstituted condensed ring and are not the bonding positions with L 101 , R 101 to R 110 and R 111 to R 120. R 1401 to R 1418 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
R 101 to R 120 are not substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl groups,
L 101 does not contain a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylene group.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
R 101 to R 120 , which are not the coupling positions with L 101 , are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 13.
R 101 to R 120 , which are not the coupling positions with L 101 , are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
A substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
R 101 to R 120 , which are not the bonding positions with L 101 , are hydrogen atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
With the anode
With the cathode
A first light emitting layer arranged between the anode and the cathode,
It has a second light emitting layer arranged between the first light emitting layer and the cathode.
The first light emitting layer contains the first compound represented by the following general formula (101) as the first host material.
The second light emitting layer contains a second compound represented by the following general formula (2) as a second host material.
The first light emitting layer and the second light emitting layer are in direct contact with each other.
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formula (101),
R 101 to R 120 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
A group represented by -O- (R 904),
A group represented by -S- (R 905),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R 801 group,
-A group represented by COOR 802,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
However, one of R 101 to R 110 indicates the connection position with L 101, and one of R 111 to R 120 indicates the connection position with L 101.
L 101 is
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
mx is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
If L 101 is present 2 or more, 2 or more L 101 may be identical to each other or different,
At least one L 101 is any group selected from the group consisting of the following general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to (TEMP-62). )

(In the general formulas (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-56) and (TEMP-58) to (TEMP-62),
Q 1 ~ Q 10 are each independently hydrogen atom, or a substituent,
Q 9 and Q 10 are bonded to each other via a single bond to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocycle, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or are not bonded to each other.
* Represents the bond position. )

(In the general formula (2),
R 201 to R 208 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
A group represented by -O- (R 904),
A group represented by -S- (R 905),
A group represented by -N (R 906 ) (R 907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R 801 group,
-A group represented by COOR 802,
Halogen atom,
Cyanide group,
Nitro group,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
L 201 and L 202 are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar 201 and Ar 202 are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms. )
(Of the first compound represented by the general formula (1) and the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R 901 , R 902 , R 903 , R 904 , R 905 , R 906 , R 907 , R 801 and R 802 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
If R 901 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 901 is the same or different from each other,
If R 902 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 902 is the same or different from each other,
If R 903 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 903 is the same or different from each other,
If R 904 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 904 is the same or different from each other,
If R 905 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 905 is the same or different from each other,
If R 906 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 906 is the same or different from each other,
If R 907 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 907 is the same or different from each other,
If R 801 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 801 is the same or different from each other,
If R 802 there are a plurality, a plurality of R 802 may or different are identical to one another. )
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 16.
The organic electroluminescence device emits light having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less when the device is driven.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 17.
The first light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent third compound.
The third compound is a compound that emits light having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 18.
The second light emitting layer further contains a fluorescent fourth compound, and the second light emitting layer further contains.
The fourth compound is a compound that emits light having a main peak wavelength of 430 nm or more and 480 nm or less.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 19.
R 201 to R 208 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkenyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkynyl groups having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,
Substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms,
-A group represented by Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903),
A group represented by -O- (R 904),
A group represented by -S- (R 905),
A group represented by -N (R 906 ) (R 907),
Substituent or unsubstituted aralkyl groups having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,
-C (= O) R 801 group,
-A group represented by COOR 802,
Halogen atom,
It is a cyano group or a nitro group,
L 201 and L 202 are independent of each other.
Single bond,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming ring-forming divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Ar 201 and Ar 202 are independent of each other.
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming aryl group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 20.
L 201 and L 202 are independent of each other.
A single-bonded, substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming arylene group having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
Ar 201 and Ar 202 are independently substituted or unsubstituted aryl groups having 6 to 50 carbon atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 20.
Ar 201 and Ar 202 are independent of each other.
Phenyl group,
Naphthalene group,
Phenantril group,
Biphenyl group,
Terphenyl group,
Diphenylfluorenyl group,
Dimethylfluorenyl group,
Benzodiphenylfluorenyl group,
Benzodiazepine fluorenyl group,
Dibenzofuranyl group,
Dibenzothienyl group,
A naphthobenzofuranyl group or a naphthobenzothienyl group,
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 22.
The second compound represented by the general formula (2) is the following general formula (201), general formula (202), general formula (203), general formula (204), general formula (205), general formula ( 206), a compound represented by the general formula (207), the general formula (208) or the general formula (209).
Organic electroluminescence element.

(In the general formulas (201) to (209),
L 201 and Ar 201 are synonymous with L 201 and Ar 201 in the general formula (2).
R 201 to R 208 are independently synonymous with R 201 to R 208 in the general formula (2). )
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 23.
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R 201 to R 208 are independent of each other.
Hydrogen atom,
Substituent or unsubstituted alkyl groups having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,
A substituted or unsubstituted ring-forming cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 carbon atoms, or a group represented by −Si (R 901 ) (R 902 ) (R 903).
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 24.
In the second compound represented by the general formula (2), R 201 to R 208 are hydrogen atoms.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 25.
In the first compound and the second compound, the groups described as "substituted or unsubstituted" are both "unsubstituted" groups.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 26.
A hole transport layer is provided between the anode and the first light emitting layer.
Organic electroluminescence element.
The organic electroluminescence device according to any one of claims 1 to 27.
An electron transport layer is provided between the cathode and the second light emitting layer.
Organic electroluminescence element.
An electronic device equipped with the organic electroluminescence element according to any one of claims 1 to 28.